JP2019107074A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of controlling properly without useless restriction, for a plurality of kinds of performance settings.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a variable display and comprises: detection means capable of detecting a plurality of kinds of operations; and performance setting means capable of setting a plurality of kinds of performances in execution of the variable display, and capable of setting a performance corresponding to a kind of detected operation. When a prescribed condition is established, setting to a specific kind of a performance is restricted in settings for a plurality of kinds of performances, and on the other hand, setting of a kind of a performance being different from setting of the specific kind of a performance is not restricted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

  Some conventional gaming machines can switch the effect mode (effect setting) during variable display. In addition, among such gaming machines, switching of the effect mode is limited according to the status of the variable display, and when the switching operation of the effect mode is performed during the restriction, the effect mode is not switched. There is one that performs a switching failure display that indicates the event (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-104704, A

  In such a gaming machine, it is conceivable that switching of a plurality of effect settings is possible during variable display, but in this case, if switching of all effect settings is uniquely limited, any of the effects There is a problem that although it is conceivable that a gaming machine capable of performing variable display in which useless restriction is made on the setting and the appropriate control can not be performed.

  The present invention has been made focusing on such problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of performing appropriate control without being unnecessarily restricted with respect to a plurality of types of effect settings. To aim.

In order to solve the above-mentioned subject, the game machine according to the means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A) capable of detecting a plurality of types of operations;
Settings related to multiple types of effects (for example, change of effect mode or change of volume of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R) are possible during execution of variable display, and settings related to effects corresponding to the type of detected operation Effect setting means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process shown in FIG. 10-17 and the volume change process shown in FIG. 10-21);
Equipped with
When the predetermined condition is established, the setting related to a specific type of effect among the settings related to a plurality of effects is restricted, but the setting different from the setting for the specific type of effect is not restricted (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-22, when execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined or during the change display of the super reach, until the end change display of the pre-read notice effect is ended, or the change display of the super reach It is impossible to change the production mode until the end of the process, while changing the volume is always possible)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately control the plurality of types of effect settings without being unnecessarily restricted.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1;
Controllable to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
The suggestion effect executing means (for example, the part for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a portion derived and displayed as a combination showing the big hit in the effect design) )When,
A restriction display for notifying that the restriction on the setting of the specific type is being performed (for example, based on establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, determination of super reach variation display or execution of preread advance presentation effect) (for example, for example , And a restriction display unit capable of displaying the operation restriction display image 127SG005c) in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-20) When,
Equipped with
The rate at which the suggested effect is executed by the suggested effect executing means differs depending on the display mode of the restricted display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, the decorative symbol is a big hit depending on the size and color of the operation restricted display image 127SG005c The part that is derived and displayed in different combinations showing
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while paying attention to the restricted display.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2;
Controllable to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
The plurality of types of settings include effect mode setting for setting one effect mode out of a plurality of effect modes (for example, A mode and B mode),
A determination unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5) that determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state when starting variable display;
Hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 10-8) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a hold storage;
Determination means for determining whether or not the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination of the determination means (for example, the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. Part to run),
Based on the determination of the determination means, it is an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect setting means, and it is anticipation advance notice determination means for making a determination regarding an advance advance notice effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. For example, the part for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-12),
Pre-reading advance notice effect executing means (for example, for pre-display indication notice effect) which executes the pre-reading advance notice effect until variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the pre-read advance notice effect is started based on the decision of the pre-read notice setting means. The part for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the suspension display updating process shown in FIG. 10-11 when the execution is determined, and the effect control CPU 120 when the execution of the background change notice effect is determined for FIG. 10-11. A portion for executing the background image update process shown, or a portion for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of 127 SGS 358 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG.
And further
The predetermined condition is a condition relating to the determination by the determination means, and the setting of the specific type is the effect mode setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads in 127SGS 343 of effect mode change processing shown in FIG. 10-17 When it is determined that the execution of the notice effect is determined, the process of ending the effect mode change process without executing the process of 127SGS345 to 127SGS 349)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to eliminate the waste that the determination is repeatedly performed by the setting change of the effect mode.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 3;
The pre-read advance notice determination means makes the determination so that at least one of the pre-read advance notice effect mode and the effect timing of the pre-read advance notice effect differs depending on the effect mode (for example, when execution of background change advance effect is determined in A mode) When the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined in and the B mode, the effect mode and the execution timing are different between the background change advance notice effect and the chance eye notice effect.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the rendering mode and the rendering timing of the previewed preview effect from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, wherein
Controllable to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
The plurality of types of settings include effect mode setting for setting one effect mode out of a plurality of effect modes (for example, A mode and B mode),
A determination unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5) that determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state when starting variable display;
Hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 10-8) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a hold storage;
Determination means for determining whether or not the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination of the determination means (for example, the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. Part to run),
Pre-reading advance notice deciding means (for example, the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 10-12 by the effect control CPU 120) capable of deciding the execution of pre-reading advance notice effect suggesting being controlled to the advantageous state based on the judgment of the judgment means Part that executes the setting process),
Pre-reading advance notice effect executing means (for example, for pre-display indication notice effect) which executes the pre-reading advance notice effect until variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the pre-read advance notice effect is started based on the decision of the pre-read notice setting means. The part for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the suspension display updating process shown in FIG. 10-11 when the execution is determined, and the effect control CPU 120 when the execution of the background change notice effect is determined for FIG. 10-11. A portion for executing the background image update process shown, or a portion for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of 127 SGS 358 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG.
When execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined by the pre-reading advance notice determining means, it is possible to execute a mode corresponding effect corresponding to the action mode set by the effect setting means, which is an action corresponding to the pre-reading advance effect. Mode corresponding production execution means (for example, a part where the CPU 120 for production control executes the on-hold display notice production notification execution processing shown in FIG. 10-11);
And further
The predetermined condition is that the execution of the advance notice effect is determined by the advance notice determining unit, and the setting of the specific type is the effect mode setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 10-17). When it is determined that the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in 127 SGS 343 of the effect mode change process shown in, the process to end the effect mode change process without executing the process of 127 SGS 3455 to 127 SGS 349)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate mode corresponding presentation from being performed.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5, and
The plurality of types of settings include effect settings relating to effects (for example, the volume of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The specific type of setting is the effect setting,
Restriction display means capable of displaying a restriction display for notifying that change restriction of the effect setting by the effect setting means is being executed (for example, as shown in the modification 127SG-1, the execution of the advance read advance notice effect When it is determined or when the variable display of the super reach is being executed, the change of the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is disabled by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the left and right direction, and the stick controller 31A is not It is characterized in that the image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying a notification of the inability to change the sound volume 127SG005e in accordance with the operation.
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the setting relating to the effect is restricted.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of fluctuation pattern and reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a preliminary production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a back perspective view of a pachinko game machine (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) Is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern determination table for loss. 6 is a flowchart showing game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows setting value confirmation processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows RAM clear processing, (B) is the schematic of RAM. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. Explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize | stored in RAM, and the state cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial stage symbol for every reception command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the alerting | reporting aspect at the time of starting of a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) It is a figure which shows the data holding area for effect control, (B) is a figure which shows a start winning combination reception command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prior notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prior notice setting process. (A) is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of pre-reading advance notice production in A mode, and the determination ratio of production type, and (B) shows the presence or absence of execution of pre-reading notice production in B mode and the determination ratio of production type FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the display pattern determination ratio of a pending | hold display advance notice production, (B) is a figure which shows the determination rate of the background image of background change notice production, (C) is a stop pattern in chance eye notice production It is a figure which shows a determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display advance notice production | generation execution process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production mode change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of presentation mode change operation restriction display presentation, (C) is a figure which shows the presentation pattern of presentation mode change operation restriction display presentation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production mode change operation restriction display production execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of volume change processing. It is a timing chart which shows the period which can perform change of a production mode, and change of volume. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. (A) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of step-up notice production | presentation, (B) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of serif notice production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also referred to as special figures) as plural types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is being held, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, "small hit" does not need to be as a display result of a special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display in execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this Embodiment, and the kind of reach. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the change display mode of the decorative design does not become a reach mode, and the non-reach loser fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1 in which the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation display pattern of reach loss that the display result becomes "loss" because the mode of the variable display of the decorative design becomes a "reach" change patterns PA2-1-PA2-6, PA3-1-PA3-4, etc., the display result is a big hit The variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and so on, which become "," are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are performed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggested effect which suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown in the number of black stars in Fig. 8-1 (B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super Reach B <Super Reach A is in the order of high. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines becoming a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. In addition, during the production of the reach of the super reach, there may be a case in which the development presentation is performed to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that, in FIG. 8A, a variation pattern is shown in which the degree of reliability develops into a super reach one stage higher, but a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability develops by two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern may be provided in which the development effect is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest degree of reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E with the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach by display only, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and voice. As described above, notification of a title is performed by more rendering devices in the case of the highly reliable reach than in the case of the less reliable reach. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively heard, and the effect of presentation is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (such as gothic and Mincho type) and the typeface (such as a line and a calligraphy) may be made different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect contents of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the super reach according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the "left", "middle" and "right" of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral of "left" and "right" is stopped to be a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of becoming super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (D), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the introduction of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is ended, such as when the introductory portion of the super reach effect is ended, While the title 31AK002 (here, the letter "SP reach A") of Super Reach A is displayed on the entire screen, a voice (here, "Super Reach A") corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8 Thus, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The following part of the reach presentation of Super Reach A where is confronted is executed. The production in which the characters face each other is also referred to as battle production, and it becomes a big hit when the ally character wins in the battle production, and loses when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when displaying words on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the speech is not limited to displaying in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like as a subtitle.

(Super reach B)
In the case of becoming the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-2 (F), the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B covers the entire screen of the image display device 5 when a predetermined period of time elapses after the Super Reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the Super Reach effect ends. (The letter "SP reach B" here) is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the title name of reach (here "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is It is informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The following part of the reach presentation of Super Reach B where is confronted is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. By doing this, since the title can be notified after showing the introduced part of the super reach effect to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the title notification.

  Also, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introductory part until a title is alert | reported, a super reach production | presentation is performed by a common production | presentation aspect (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is to be achieved after the start of the super reach effect, and which title is to be notified. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, it is not limited to completely sharing the presentation mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by watching the presentation, etc. The parts may be in a common presentation mode. For example, in the introductory part of super reach A and super reach B, super reach production (for example, production which displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a mode related to a title notified thereafter You may By doing this, the rendering effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the rendering. In this manner, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31 AK 007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) of Super Reach D is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, as the voice corresponding to the reach title name (here, “kill the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, the title of the super reach D is notified. As described above, in Super Reach D, a title is notified at the start of Super Reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree indication 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In addition, the alerting | reporting by the audio | voice of super reach D is not alert | reporting a title name as it is, but the content of reach is alert | reported. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is made different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification form of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31 AK 007 and the expectation degree indication 31 AK 008 continue to be displayed by being reduced in the upper right portion or the like of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can grasp the expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In addition, in FIG. 8-2 (I), although the same rendering content as FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) is shown, super reach production only for super reach D is performed. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is displayed. To be executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 (here, the letters "SP reach E") of Super Reach E is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, notification of a title by voice is not performed. Also, in conjunction with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is the enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other To be executed. As described above, in the Super Reach E, a title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low hit probability, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 8-2 (D), (F)). , (H)). By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the case of super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of the super reach with a high hit probability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach reach production with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title will be announced at the start. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach, which have low jackpot reliability, In E, the title was notified at the start of the Super Reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of Super Reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reach effect.

(Display area of title)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen of. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a large hit reliability, since title notification is performed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

  The method of varying the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be optionally changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit probability, title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low degree of reliability. Further, in the case where the display area to be notified of the title is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the place to be displayed may be made different.

(Expected degree indication indication)
In this embodiment, super reach A and super reach B with high hit reliability do not display anticipation indication in the title notification in super reach A and super reach D with lower hit reliability than super reach A and super reach B. In the title notification in, the expectation indication was displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effects from being disturbed. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E whose jackpot reliability is lower than Super Reach D, the expectation indication is not displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying the expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the low reliability reach. Note that the expectation indication may be displayed on at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) etc., the expectation indication is not limited to the one shown by the number of black stars, but may be made to indicate the expectation with a meter or a gauge, or the expectation may be The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, it is possible to increase the number of stages of expectation by enabling display of a half equivalent (half) of black stars. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach presentation is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In addition, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach presentation. Moreover, by performing as described above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed since it is possible to improve the rendering effect regardless of the display end timing.

  In addition, although it is abbreviate | omitted about the production | presentation operation | movement of the reach production of the super reach C here, the title alert | report according to big hit reliability and an expectation degree suggestion display should just be performed, for example.

(Decided production)
After each reach effect is performed, when it is time to derive the display result (end of the variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is “big hit” is performed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit", and a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the determined effect that the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), The finalized decorative design that will be a big hit combination is derived. In addition, if a display result is "loss", the image which shows that the ally character loses is displayed, and the finalized decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination is derived | led-out.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a clear title notification.

  In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative symbol is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. The way of displaying the decorative design during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying a character that is permanently displayed during hold display, active display, variable display or display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach. It may be At that time, during low-reliability reach effects such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively expected by the reach effect with low reliability, and to be able to pay attention to the reach effect in the highly reliable reach effect.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation when the development rendering is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is performed when the reach effect of the super reach D is being performed (the title notification of the super reach D is being performed), as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is performed such that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the case where the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  In addition, the development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but it may be an effect in which a crack is gradually broken on the screen, or a sandstorm (display as if it is broken) It may be displayed. With such an effect, unexpected effects can be performed. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gasse, such as an effect in which a reach is not developed, although a crack gradually enters the screen.

(Expected degree suggestive production)
In the stage operation example shown in Fig. 8-2 (H), a black star indicating the expected degree is displayed from the beginning that the expected degree indication 31AK008 indicates the expected degree, but five white stars are displayed first, and the stage is displayed. It may be made to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, expectation indication 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect is performed that fits within one of the white stars of the degree indication 31AK021. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black star is highlighted as if it is illuminated. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  In the example shown in Figure 8-5 (A)-(F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation degree indication has been increased by one step. One or more may be displayed to increase the expectation by two or more. In addition, half black stars may be displayed to increase the expectation by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Also, there may be a case where the voice is not output. By doing this, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation increasing at one time, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation increasing as it is displayed on the white star indicating the expectation degree indication. You may make it perform such an effect.

(Demonstration mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different rendering mode, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the rendering based on the command is executed in a different rendering mode. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound outputted from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  8-5 (G) to 8 (L) show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5A to 8F, title notification and expectation degree suggestion effects are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 different in the effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. Moreover, the expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a rhombus.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect is performed that fits within one of the white rhombuses of the degree indication 31AK024. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pong" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted as if it were illuminated. Thus, depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title, and the effect is achieved. improves.

  Although FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the rendering operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach rendering (title notification, degree of expectation) is performed according to the rendering mode (state when the reach rendering is performed) The presentation mode of the suggestion effect may be varied. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is to be notified or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing this, effects according to the player's preferences can be performed, and the effects of the effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree indication display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect of increasing the number of black stars in a stepwise manner is performed, but the expectation degree It is also possible to execute an expectation indication effect of decreasing the number of indications suggesting a. Such an expected degree suggestive effect may be performed in addition to or in place of the expected degree suggestive effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of developmental direction)
In the case of executing an expectation degree indication effect of increasing the display degree indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree indication display step by step, the development effect may be performed after the display indicating the expectation degree is increased. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed not in stages but at one time. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is informed and the effect of gradually increasing black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), an image is displayed. A development effect is performed in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the characters “SP reach C”) is displayed. , And the title of Super Reach C is informed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree indication 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, it is displayed at one time. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect may be performed in which the title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation change.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the notice effect, a title notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed according to a notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), while the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black and the audio corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), a title preview is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title preview is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title preview is executed. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, there may be a case where the display mode (display color) of the title changes after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed other than black from the start of display of the title.

  In addition, when a title advance notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, an audio according to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Further, the title notification by audio may be performed after the display mode (display color) of the title changes. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after change.

(Title execution timing)
It is preferable to execute notification of a title during reach at a timing other than the execution timing of a presentation (specific presentation) such as a preliminary presentation production or a development presentation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing this, when the title is notified once, an effect of improving the expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing an example of advance notice effect determination processing for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the advance notice effect and the effect mode. The preview control effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance presentation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (presence or absence of the execution of the preview of the title) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "loss", the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), for example. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from “Black”, “Red”, “Black” to “Red”, or “Black” to “Fruit” as shown in Fig. 8-9 (A). What changes, "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and in this order (ascending order), the big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the rendering effect is improved.

  In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be "fruit pattern" . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is performed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the one in which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the display period of the title is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine one of the changing timings. Then, in the case of a super reach (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in which the display period of the title is short, the number of changing timing may be one or less than the super reach in which the display period of the title is long.

  As the effect mode, when there are the normal mode and the special mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the preview of the title different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character's serif in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After the display color of the Super Reach title is determined, the display color of the character's speech (the presence or absence of the serif announcement) in the reach effect of the Super Reach is determined (Step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "loss", the display color of the speech in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C). As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display color of the speech in the reach production changes from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”. The big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the speech. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the speech, and the rendering effect is improved. It should be noted that, for those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the one in which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the presentation style of the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the same presentation mode (display color) is included in the title preview and the speech preview, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same presentation mode is obtained. Also, the big hit reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the change timing of the presentation mode with the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big hit reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the change timings of the title preview and the speech preview.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, in the special mode, the display color of the speech may be determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that in place of the speech notice, a notice effect may be executed to give notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided, and the big hit reliability may be different according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the speech in the reach effect or when it is determined not to be the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31 S001; No), the execution presence or effect mode is determined for other advance effects (step AK31 S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance presentation effect determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the super reach, it is possible to execute the title preview and the speech preview, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low reliability super reach), the title preview. And at least one of the serif announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title preview and the speech preview have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, for example, even if the decision ratio is made different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing this, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of effect modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title preview and the speech preview. By doing this, the effects are diversified and the effect is enhanced. In the title preview and the speech preview, the number of playable presentation modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of playable production modes may be the same. By doing this, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Effect production)
When the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes, a presentation may be performed that indicates that the presentation mode changes. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a speech may be performed. Then, after the effect presentation is performed, the presentation mode (display color) of the title or speech may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image and the like) of the action effect may be common to any of the title and words. Note that there may be cases where the presentation mode of the title or speech does not change despite the action presentation being performed. In the case of executing the effect presentation, the presence / absence of the execution of the operation presentation, the execution timing, and the presentation mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title preview and the speech preview. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31 S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the function presentation) may be different according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, The ratio (the ratio of acting on which effect mode) of the serif announcement and which presentation mode changes may be different, or the ratio of what color (in which stage) changes may be different. . By executing such an operation effect, the player becomes aware of which one of the title and the speech to act when the operation effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of effect effects and effect modes may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing this, it is possible to execute the action presentation according to the presentation mode, and the presentation effect is improved.

  As another example of such effect presentation, at least one of the presentation aspect (display color) of either the title or the speech according to the presentation content of the reach presentation (for example, the action of the character, the presentation content in the battle presentation, etc.) May change. By doing this, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic parts described in the above embodiment are not essential components, and can be appropriately omitted.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Although the term “sub-liquid crystal” is used here, the sub-display device may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub-liquid crystal, various effects such as display of preliminary effects and hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title notification, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title in the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand the title and the expectation indication which can display the title and the expectation indication without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a reach effect title as a suggested effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to title notification (information that mainly displays characters) regarding other effects. May be For example, in the case of executing pre-reading zone effect in which the background image in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) different as the pre-notice effect, for example, The present invention may be applied to the title notification of When presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate an enemy using a stick controller, etc.”), and execute a mission effect that will be in the player's favor when the mission is achieved. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification 31AK-1 of Feature 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is performed, and then the display result is displayed ( Fig. 8-3 (B) to (D). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected in the operation valid period. The display result may be indicated by displaying the outcome of the battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing this, since the display result is indicated according to the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and the interest is improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a production operation of the super reach in the modified example 31AK-1 in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the character 31AK041, which is an ally character, and the character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), reach effects in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other are executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), the small button image 31AK043 and the restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thus, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that operation effects are to be executed are prepared. And big hit reliability differs according to which operation production image is displayed and operation production is performed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is performed during the reach effect may be changed to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 The image changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits on is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an operation effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the operation effect is performed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the control line 31AK 044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J) before the display result is derived, and as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the screen, prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. Thereafter, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. In addition, when operation is not detected within the operation effective period defined beforehand, the image shown to FIGS. 8-11 (L) will be displayed automatically.

  In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and the operation effect using these images is performed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image If you hit the jackpot reliability is high. Even when the operation effect image with a low degree of reliability is displayed, the operation effect image with a high degree of reliability may be changed during the reach effect, so the effect of presentation is improved, and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the rendering operation example shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11, the notification of the reach title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 It may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (presence or absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG.

(Modification 31AK-2 of Feature 31AK)
A suggestion display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. For example, the shutter effect that performs the first indication display and the reach title effect that performs the second indication display may be performed. In the shutter effect, after the start of variable display, an effect of covering the screen with shutter display is performed. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title preview of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined in another process.

  The specific image is an image of high hit reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In any of the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect execution, when the display is performed with the fruit pattern image, the big hit reliability is higher than the time when the display is not performed with the fruit pattern image. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including each of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit reliability when shutter production and reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification that the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The light emission control of the common sound and the game effect lamp 9 indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIGS. 8-12 are display screen diagrams when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display in the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrow indicates the variable display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, characters of "battle reach" indicating that reach effect with battle effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Tsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, it returns to the variable display screen by the original number symbol. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), all of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high hit probability has been displayed.

  Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  The determination (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) relating to the shutter effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 8-8. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31 AKS 002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily performed. Further, the determination of the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination of the shutter effect.

(Description of the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the feature part 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. The front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the feature portion 31AK described above. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, a lock switch 122SG051 for switching the main board 11 to a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. And a setting change switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot probability (outgoing ball ratio) described later in the setting change state, and an opening sensor 122SG090 for detecting opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

  A setting switching main body provided with an operation portion operable by the player such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switching switch 122SG052 is accommodated in the substrate case 122SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switching switch 122SG052 Is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back left side of the substrate case 122SG201 so as to be operable without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting change switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is extremely difficult when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, and a predetermined door key Operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 3 to use. Further, since the lock switch 122SG 051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk who holds the setting key can be operated. In addition, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation, which are described later, using the setting key. In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

  The main board 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted / received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characterizing portion 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is displayed on the display device 5 so as to be variably displayed on the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in response to the variable symbol display of the special symbol game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is “loss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating stop of variation (decision) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specifying command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the generated error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified in the effect control board 12 side which error (abnormality) has been judged to be generated. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22 B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol display device 4B was satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage count notification command for notifying the first special view storage limit in order to display the special map storage limit in an identifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (also referred to as power failure recovery, hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the change operation of the setting value (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated in the setting change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the change operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated in the setting change state) wp. The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 The random number circuit 104 is configured to include an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 and a real time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special view display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for common result display result determination, and the random value MR5 for initial value determination of MR4 are controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  In the present embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are respectively used as the values in the range shown in FIG. 9-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the respective random numbers are used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” or “reach”, respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the display result being a "big hit" or the like. In addition, one fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the like. In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss" and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is referred to as non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss fluctuation pattern") The variation pattern corresponding to the display result of "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol being "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. Multiple normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, with regard to the special view fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is executed, as shown in FIG. It is set shorter than. Further, with regard to the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed. The special pattern fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is "big hit" in order of the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as described later, for example, the type of fluctuation pattern such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining it first, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, a random value for variation pattern type determination is provided, and these variations are determined. A fluctuation pattern belonging to a fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type since the fluctuation pattern type is determined first from the random value for pattern type determination It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the content of the change (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each change pattern, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The content of the variation (content of presentation) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same according to the set value which is not limited and is set. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of normal reach loss, when the set value being set is 1, it is regarded as a fluctuation pattern that becomes normal reach loss, and when the set value being set is 2, pseudo sequential effect As a variation pattern which is executed twice and becomes a non-reach loss, when the set value set is 3, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times to be a variation pattern which becomes a super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11 in the ROM 101, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), Display result judgment table (setting value 3) shown in -6 (C), jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), jackpot type judgment shown in FIG. 9-7 (B) Other than the table (for the second special symbol), big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, lost fluctuation pattern judgment table, common figure display result judgment table (not shown), common drawing fluctuation pattern decision table (not shown) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment is configured to change the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit and the small hit according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (wining probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability (outfall rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed It has become. The set value is composed of three stages 1 to 3, with 3 being the highest and the withdrawal rate becoming lower as the value becomes smaller in the order of 3, 2 and 1. That is, in the case where 3 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 2 and 1, the degree of advantage gradually decreases. In other words, with the setting value, 3 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 2 and 1, the more advantageous value for the game arcade side.

  FIGS. 9-6A to 9-6C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first and second special views is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first special figure and the second special figure may use separate display result determination tables.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) to FIG. 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state), a normal state or a short time state (low) More judgment values are assigned to the "big hit" special view display results than in the positive state). As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" when in the normal state or the time reduction state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (in the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/150 when the setting value is 2, and 1/99 when the setting value is 3) In comparison, the probability that it is determined that the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" is high (in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/150, the set value is 1/99 for 2 and 1/50 for a set value of 3). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state to be high.

  In each display result determination table, the special view display result is "small hit" depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) or the definite variation state (high probability state). Judgment values are assigned so that the probability to be determined to control small hit games is the same (for example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/99 when the setting value is 2, setting value Is 3 if 1/50).

  Furthermore, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is the "big hit" or "small hit" as the big hit gaming state or small hit The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is low, and when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is most regarded as a "big hit" or "small hit" as the special view display result. Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to be controlled to the state becomes high (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) to FIG. 9-6 (C). If any of the hit judgment values is matched, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C) for the special symbol. Further, if MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control to a small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A to 9-6C, a mode is illustrated in which the probability of winning a small hit is made different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when any display result determination table is used (regardless of the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1), the probability of winning a small hit is the same. It may be

  Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A to 9-6C. A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is judged separately whether to make the variable display result a big hit or not and a small hit or not. It is also good. Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-6A to 9-6C, determination values are assigned to small hits in each display result determination table, but as shown in FIG. 9-6A. In the display result determination table (the display result determination table referred to when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hitting probability differs according to the set value set includes that the small hitting probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and pachinko gaming machines The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) In the case of Further, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) It is a table of cases.

  The jackpot type determination table is one of the jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number for judging the jackpot type (MR2) when it is judged that the variable display result is to be the jackpot symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine the

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 9-8. In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, only the time reduction control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the big hit A (also referred to as non-probable variation big hit) to shift to the low probability high base state. After completion, high probability control and time saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a positive variation big hit) to shift to a high probability high base state is set.

  The big hit gaming state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit repeatedly performed five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player, "big hit" The jackpot gaming state according to B "is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) of changing the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit gaming state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit repeatedly performed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time reduction control to be executed after the end of the big hit gaming state by "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment), or It ends by becoming a big hit game state before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high probability control and the time saving control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit generated again is a big hit B or a big hit C, since the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state is continuous without passing through the normal state. It will be in the so-called continuous state.

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, although a configuration in which three types of big hit A to big hit C are provided as the big hit type is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2 You may provide below a kind or four types or more.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, within the range 0 to 299 of the MR2 determination value , 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 is assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to the big hit B. , And 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, while the ratio for determining the big hit A in which only the time-saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is the same, the time control is performed after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of determining the big hit C among the big hit B and the big hit C, in which both the and the variation control are executed, decreases in the order of the set value 3, 2, 1 in the order of the set value 3, 2, 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the setting rate set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the setting value is 3 and the setting rate set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest. The payout rate is the lowest when 1 is 1.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value range is 0 to 299. Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to the big hit B. , And 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 is assigned to the big hit C. (The big hit B is not assigned a judgment value).

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, while the ratio for determining the big hit A in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, the time control is performed after the big hit game ends. The ratio of determining the big hit C among the big hit B and the big hit C, in which both the and the variation control are executed, decreases in the order of the set value 3, 2, 1 in the order of the set value 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the setting rate set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the setting value is 3 and the setting rate set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest. The payout rate is the lowest when 1 is 1.

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation feature is the second feature and the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. Exemplifies that the jackpot type determination ratio is different depending on the set value being set, that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Even if the variation special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it may include the case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. .

  As described above, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variation display result is the jackpot differs according to the set value set, the game interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is The determination may be made using MR1, which is a random number value for special view display result determination.

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined). The present invention is not limited thereto, but may be advantageous for the player as the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is smaller. .

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game property itself is not changed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the game property may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the gaming property (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal status is 1/320 and the probability status is 65% When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the predetermined hit provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 with a big hit probability of 1/200 in the normal state, a big hit game during the big hit game While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a definite change state based on passing through, while the percentage of the game ball passing the predetermined switch during the big hit game varies according to the fluctuation special view (so-called V If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is performed during high base (time control). Special variable ball on A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3 in the game property, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than the case where the setting values are any of 1 to 3 A setting in which the number of award balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the case where the game property is changed in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the case of the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time the game ball passes a predetermined area) When used as a switch to execute a predetermined effect, and the setting value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a definite state or state based on the fact that the game ball has passed a predetermined switch) You may use as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, and the variation display result as "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and the loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost” ing.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit, each fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern judgment table is a jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (jackpot A used when the jackpot type is jackpot A). And a variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C) to be used when the big hit type is big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit change pattern determination tables (big hit) The fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) for A) and big hit, the fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number within the range that random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, 1 to 9 within the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Up to 400 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), and from 401 to 850 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and from 851 to 997 are super reach β It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 350 out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 300 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 800 The super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and the bands 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, within the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 decision value , 1 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), 351 to 997 are It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 150 within the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 200 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

  As described above, when the big hit A is won in the special view game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3) It is designed to be higher and lower in the order of 3, 2, 1 setting values. In addition, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the ratio determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit It is higher than the ratio, and lower in the order of the set values 3, 2 and 1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A" in the present embodiment. In the case where the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may say that “big hit B” or “big hit C” will be made. Can increase your sense of expectation.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is a decision value within the range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 3 regardless of whether the set value is 1, 2 or 3. Among 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hitting fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a variation pattern of small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern of 2 or more is provided as a variation pattern of small hits, The variation patterns of small hits may be determined at set values 1, 2, and 3 at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, there is a variation pattern determination table A for loss which is used when the number of holding memories is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not implemented for time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D which are used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the change pattern determination table A for loss, the change pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the change pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the change pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), super reach A predetermined random number value is allocated as a determination value within the range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the β loss.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table for loss (for the low base middle total hold number of 1 or less), the MR3 judgment value is used. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 〜900 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 90901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 400 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA 1-1) of non-reach loss, and 401 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 1 to 350 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 351 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the super reach fluctuation in which the total number of pending memories corresponds to 2 to 4 A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3) ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table B for loss (for the low base middle total hold number for 2 to 4), the judgment value of MR 3 Within the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), The range from 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the range from 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 451 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 within the range of 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 401 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss of shortening (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8, fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3) ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table for loss (for 5 or more low base / middle total pending storages), the judgment value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 〜900 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 90901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 500 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA 1-1) of non-reach loss, and 501 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 1 to 450 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA 1-1) of non-reach loss, and 451 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss of shortening (PA1-4) corresponding to time-shortening control, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss ( PA2-2) A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range which can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), when the set value is “1” in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base, medium), within the range 1 to 997 of the MR 3 determination value, 1 to 50 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 500 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA 1-1) of non-reach loss, and 501 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 1 to 450 within the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA 1-1) of non-reach loss, and 451 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  As described above, when the change pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is , Setting values 3, 2 and 1 are in order of decreasing. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, among the judgment values, the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss and the fluctuation values of super reach α and 901 to 997 are super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. If the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each, that is, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the set value set, so the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the rendering effect from being reduced by the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  The “common determination ratio” in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is different from the one in which the determination ratio is completely the same with different set values (the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment) The determination ratio includes the same determination ratio (for example, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the setting value 1 to the setting value 3).

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be the same, or only the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach variation pattern may be the same.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are regardless of the set value set. Although the form which is the same regardless of the set value in which both of the determination rates are set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is lost, the super reach α is The determination rate of the change pattern of the loss pattern and the determination rate of the change pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value set. Although the present embodiment exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value for which is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit Regardless, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different according to the set value set, but it is set. Among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns, there may be one or more variation patterns that can not be determined, depending on the set value. In other words, that the variation pattern determination ratio differs according to the set value that has been set, that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or that a particular variation pattern is 100% It is also included to determine the ratio of

  The fluctuation time is shorter for the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) than for the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach loss fluctuation is greater than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time is shorter in the pattern (PA1-3) (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach losing variation pattern is determined with a short variation time, so that the pending storage is easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 When start winning is achieved, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting winning without holding memory, and when the number of holding memories decreases, fluctuation pattern of non-reach lose without long shortening of fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display becomes long, and it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest of the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10A to 9C, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the variation is performed using a different loss variation pattern determination table according to the total number of pending storages. Although the form which determines a pattern is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The number of pending storages in the special symbol for variation object (for example, the 1st, when performing change indication of the 1st special symbol) The variation pattern may be determined using different loss variation pattern determination tables according to the number of reserved storages of special symbols and the number of storages of second special symbols when variable display of the second special symbols is executed.

  In addition, in each of the variation pattern determination tables for loss in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss, regardless of whether the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value from 1 to 3. The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the big hit probability and the lost probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss) The appearance rate of the) differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, although the ratio in which the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss is different according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the form is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the big hit probability and the lost probability for each set value, the variable display changes at the same rate regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the super reach loss It may be made to be performed by a change pattern.

  The RAM 102 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9A may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source which is partially or entirely produced on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (eg, a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special view reserve storage unit, a second special view reserve storage unit, a general drawing reserve storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  The first special drawing reserve storage unit is a special drawing that has not been started yet although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first start winning) occurs. Hold data of the game (special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the establishment of the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 for variable display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. The memory number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in this special view game (special view display result It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on.

  In the second special view reserve storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second start winning) occurs although it has not been started yet The reserve data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, and establishment of the second start condition in passing (enter) the game balls The random number value MR1 for variable display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in this special view game (special view display result It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on.

  The game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball having passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the second start winning port. The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reservation storage unit is associated with the holding number in the order in which the game balls passed through the passage gate, and is used for judging the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numeric data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and periodically according to execution of software by the CPU 103 Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the game control main process in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. When the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122 SGSa 004; N), the process proceeds to 122 SGSa 014.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122 SGSa 004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (122 SGSa 005) . In 122 SGSa 005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, based on a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122 SGSa 005; N), the process proceeds to 122 SGSa 014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122 SGSa 005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board start start waiting timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 starts (122 SGSa 006). Then, the value of the effect control board start start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122 SGSa 007), and it is determined whether the effect control board start start wait timer has timed out (122 SGSa 008). If the effect control substrate start start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and a period of time until the effect control substrate 12 starts is waited. When the effect control board start start waiting timer has timed out (122 SGSa 008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 122 SG 051 is ON (122 SGS a 009).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether the opening sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), the setting value confirmation process for displaying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and a clerk etc. of the game arcade displays The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) by visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa 010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or when the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after execution of the setting value confirmation processing. That is, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is activated without being operated, the setting value is set if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned on. It can not be confirmed.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs restoration processing for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of the power supply stop. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored (started by hot start) in the state before power interruption, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122 SGSa013).

  In 122 SGSa 014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board start start waiting timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board start start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa016). If the effect control board start start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again, and a period of time until the effect control board 12 starts is waited. When the effect control board start start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is determined whether there is any (122SGSa018).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and proceeds to 122SGSa021 ( 122 SGSa 019).

  Furthermore, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the release sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, setting change processing (122SGSa020) for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 And go to 122SGSa021. That is, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the setting value can not be changed as long as the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

  If the release sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104. Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed periodically so that the timer interruption is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and the interruption is permitted (122SGSa023). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  9-12 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa 031), and is stored in the address F 001 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa 032). Then, it is determined whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes 122SGSa033 to wait until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122 SGSa 051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122 SG 029 (122 SGSa 034) and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 It transmits, and ends setting value check processing (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, ending the setting confirmation state (terminating the setting value confirmation processing) results in the same state as when starting up by a normal hot start, so in the processing of 122SGSa035. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 9-13A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122 SGSa 041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122 SGSa 042). When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or if backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the first address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000 so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the setting value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122 SGSa 046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122 SGSa 045 (122 SGSa 047). ; Y) ends the RAM clear process.

  As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the RAM 102 in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, an address (F000 to FXXX) is assigned to each storage area. Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the second address from the top of the RAM 102 (F001) will be described later. Temporary set values are stored. Furthermore, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), as well as clear switch backup information that can specify whether the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated, as well as special view hold storage and general drawing hold Game information including memory, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the top address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be performed without fail. The pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process may be prompted to restart by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, in the RAM clear process in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, an address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) storing the setting value. ) Clears data other than the set value by storing “00H”, while “00H” is stored in all addresses (F000 to FXXX) in RAM 102 when there is a problem in RAM 102 or there is no backup data. Is a process of clearing all data including setting values.

  Although the characteristic value 122SG in the present embodiment stores the setting value at the first address F000 of the RAM 102, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value is stored at the last address of the RAM 102. It is also good. When the setting value is stored at the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 as an address for clearing data when executing the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 9-13 (A). The address “00H” may be stored in order from the address F000 to the address immediately before the address F00.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the form is shown to clear data excluding the setting value of the RAM 102, but the present invention is limited thereto If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F003 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. You may

  Further, although the feature part 122SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information is used for game control. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in the register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, accumulator, which is the center of operation, flag register for storing accumulator state, or general purpose register). May be omitted to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the process from overwriting other information (data).

  9-14 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the set value change process is started (at the timing when it is determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the operation of the setting change switch 122SG052 is present (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the setting value "2", which is a setting value advantageous to the player by one step than "1", is set as a temporary setting value. If the setting value stored in the address F 001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122 SG 029 is “2”, the setting value “3”, which is more advantageous to the player by one step than “2”, is tentative. It is stored in the address F 001 of the RAM 102 as a setting value. If the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If there is no operation of the setting switch in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is performed without performing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056, stores the new temporary setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it at the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 at the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored in the address F001 (the temporary setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, thereby setting the setting value stored in the address F001 as the main setting value. (The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed) Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command according to the setting value stored in the address F 000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 and ends the setting change processing. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change process, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead of the command, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is ended).

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a new setting value is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning the lock switch 122SG051 off (a temporary setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball to the start winning hole, the operation of the clear switch, the pressing operation of the lock switch 122SG051, etc. After setting the lock switch 122SG051 to OFF after performing the operation of the new setting value may be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started cold start or started in the setting change state, a cold start notification command or setting value change start to the effect control board 12 Although the form which performs RAM clear processing before transmitting a notice command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, as for RAM clear processing, a cold start notice is given to the production control board 12 It may be executed after sending a command or a setting value change start notification command.

  Furthermore, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the RAM clear process is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the RAM clear processing is executed again (other than the setting value stored in the address F 000 of the RAM 102) To clear the data). By doing this, it is possible to prevent problems such as the start of the game while illegal data is stored in the RAM.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the common RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed after activation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start and when activated by the setting change state. Although the form which transmits the command (Cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command and setting value change end notification command) according to the state to the production control board 12 is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. In the case of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 by cold start and when starting it in the setting change state, the command corresponding to the start state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command or setting value change) Common RAM clear after sending end notification command) to effect control board 12 It may perform the physical.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes the power-off detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes the switch process (S21) to the command control process (S27). . As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has fallen below a predetermined value. (122 SGSa 051). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122 SGSa 051; N), the process ends. If there is an input of the power-off signal (122 SGSa 051; Y), specify backup data including the setting value stored in the RAM 102. (122 SGS 053) The specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122 SGS 053). Then, check data to be used for recovering the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (122 SGS 054), and then the processing shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, main effect control processing in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process that the effect control CPU 120 executes. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122 SGS 401 a), clears the RAM 122 and sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 12) Perform register setting etc. of the circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (122 SGS 401 b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 (122SGS 402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122 SGS 403), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122 SGS 404). If the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122 SGS 404; N), the processing of 122 SGS 403 and 122 SGS 404 is repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until it times out.

  Then, when the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122 SGS 404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (122 SGS 405). When the hot start notification command is received (122 SGS 405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (in the player information input process described later, the player After the input of the information is received, the information including the number of changes, the number of big hits, the number of times of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122 SGS 417 (122 SGS 406).

  When the hot start notification command is not received (122 SGS 405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the cold notification command is received (122 SGS 407). When the cold notification command is received (122 SGS 407; Y), the player information and presentation information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of times of fluctuation stored in the RAM 122 from the previous activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits Clears the information including the number of times of super reach (122 SGS 408) and clears the information stored in the RAM 102, and clears the player information and presentation information stored in the RAM 122. The RAM clear notification process for notifying (performing RAM clear notification) is executed (122 SGS 409). In the RAM clear notification process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, and outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is sufficient that the store clerk or the like of the game arcade who has done the above can be notified that the player information and presentation information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122 SGS 417.

  If the cold start notification command has not been received (122 SGS 407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the setting value change start notification command has been received (122 SGS 410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122 SGS 410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, notification that the setting value change operation is in progress (notification of changing the setting value) Informing processing during setting value change to execute () is performed (122 SGS 411). The state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened, and a store clerk or the like of the game arcade who changes the setting value is the main board 11 The display monitor 122 SG 029 mounted on the screen is visually recognized. That is, since the setting change state is a state in which the store clerk or the like of the game arcade who changes the setting value can not visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5, the store clerk of the game arcade displays the image It is considered that it can not be judged from the display of the device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state to the clerk of the game arcade who changes the setting value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 as the notification of setting value change. Inform that it is good.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of a setting value change end notification command and a setting value specification command, that is, whether or not the setting value of the setting value has been completed (122SGS 412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value specification command are received (122 SGS 412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value specification command (setting stored in the address F 000 of the RAM 102) A value) is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (values of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG 413). Then, after the processing of 122 SGS 408 and 122 SGS 409 described above is performed, the process proceeds to 122 SGS 417. If there is no reception of at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value specification command (122SGS 412; N), the processing of 122SGS 411 and 122SGS 412 is repeatedly executed.

  Although the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after execution of the notification during the setting value change, the present invention is not limited to this, and notification during the setting value change The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during notification of the setting value change, the RAM clearing notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the setting value change. Notification may be performed.

  When the setting value change start notification command is not received (122 SGS 410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether it has started (122SGS 414). When the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122 SGS 414; Y), the setting value confirmation informing process for notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state (that the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122 SG 029) Execute (122 SGS 415). In the notification processing during setting value confirmation, a clerk at a game arcade that has activated the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. It is only necessary to notify the setting confirmation state around the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the setting control confirmation end notification command is not received (122 SGS 410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the processing of 122 SGS 405, and performs a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, and setting. It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification command is received (processing of 122 SGS 405, 122 SGS 407, 122 SGS 410, 122 SGS 414 is repeatedly executed).

  As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or setting change state, player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach etc. after receiving the input of the player information from the RAM 122, the information for presentation (the number of fluctuations from the previous activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The number of times of super reach and the like and the set value information (one of numerical values “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, while the player information and the information for presentation are cleared from the RAM 122, the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, while the player information and the information for presentation are not cleared from the RAM 122, the setting value information is stored in the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to overwrite (update storage).

  That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the player information and the presentation information are cleared, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state. Although the player information and the information for presentation are not cleared in the example, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the game is Person information and information for presentation may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122 SGS 417, the CPU 120 for effect control specifies which of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value change end notification command, and setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. In the device 5, display of an initial symbol according to the received command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol from the left in combination of "1", "2" and "3". Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is selected from the left as an initial symbol. The display of the decoration pattern is started with the combination of 4 "," 5 "and" 6 ".

  In the feature portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is selected from the left “4”, “5” as an initial symbol. “,” “6” is used to illustrate the form of starting display of the decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value (eg, “1”) advantageous for the player is When set, the setting value disadvantageous to the player is higher than that when the setting (for example, "3") is set, and the decorative symbol is set as the initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6". You may display it. By doing this, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value advantageous to the player, and the game interest can be improved.

  In the feature portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is selected from the left “4”, “5” as an initial symbol. “,” “6” is used to illustrate the form of starting display of the decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value (eg, “1”) advantageous for the player is The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be made different between when it is set and when a set value which is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. In addition, when a setting value (for example, "1") advantageous for the player is set and when a setting value disadvantageous for the player (for example "3") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The volume of the sound to be output, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be made different.

  Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the read restriction counter to regulate the execution of the read advance notice effect in the first four changes (122 SGS 418). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS 420), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122 SGS 421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or not. If it is the first interrupt from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value change end notification command, and setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, The activation notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. The notification may be executed.

  In the feature portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the situation, the mode of notification of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, new to the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is not set, the light emission for 60 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. Although the light emission start timing for 60 seconds of these game effect lamps 9 and the output start timing of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds are the same, the light emission start timing for 60 seconds of these game effect lamps 9 and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  Further, when a cold start notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, light emission for 60 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. Incidentally, although the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds, the light emission start timings of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  That is, in the specific control in the present invention, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. Includes both of B's output execution.

  In addition, when the setting value change end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect Light emission from lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of output sound C for 20 seconds from speakers 8L and 8R, and display of a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the change of setting values is completed) on image display device 5 Run. Although the light emission start timing of 40 seconds of these game effect lamps 9, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image in the image display device 5 are the same, The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. However, in order to display a message image on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 are indicated.

  As described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the image on the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko games About notification mode at the time of start of machine 1, notification period of when hot start notification command or setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) 60 seconds, cold start notification command The notification period is 60 seconds when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and the notification when the setting value change end notification command is received (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state) The period is 40 seconds.

  In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode is described in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a game arcade management computer and each machine counter, and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated. As an activation notification at the time of the activation, a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, there is a part in common with the device that performs the start notification even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. Although a certain form (in which the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed in any case) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot The device that performs the start notification differs depending on which of the start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state is activated (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the external output terminal mentioned above outputs a signal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, while all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in pachinko gaming machine 1 are lit, pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound output is performed from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When three or more speakers are provided, sound output is performed only from a part of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold while displaying a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", in the image display device 5. When the image display device 5 starts up, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “The RAM has been cleared” may be displayed.

  Furthermore, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, terminals for outputting a signal to the management apparatus may be made different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a period until the change of the setting value ends (a setting value change end notification command or a setting value specification command is received) as notification of setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the setting value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  In addition, when using an external output terminal in common in each alerting | reporting, you may make it differ the timing which outputs a signal with respect to a management apparatus according to each alerting | reporting.

  As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 The start notification may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, although the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, the embodiment is executed even when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation completion notification command, and the setting value change completion notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation completion notification command, and the setting value change completion notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is You may provide the command which does not perform starting alerting | reporting.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, activation notification in a different mode is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 In the illustrated example, different decorative designs are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the device is activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these initialization effects may be displayed. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may all be different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only some of them may be the same.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, is started by the cold start, is started by the setting change state, or is activated by the setting confirmation state. Although the embodiment in which the start notification is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications May not be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (122 SGS 422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has fallen below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122 SGS 431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122 SGS 431; N), the processing ends, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (122 SGS 431; Y), the setting value information and player information etc. stored in the RAM 122 The backup data to be included is identified (122 SGS 432), and the identified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122 SGS 433). Then, after creating check data to be used for recovering backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS 434), the processing shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the CPU for effect control 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: 122SGS 423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (122 SGS 424). In the effect control process, of the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect random number updating process (122 SGS 425) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol judging random number, the player information input process (122 SGS 426) for accepting the player information The player information output process (122SGS 427) for outputting the player information and the effect information tallying process (122SGS 428) for tallying the effect information are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives an input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the variation count, the big hit count, the super reach count, etc. as the player information stored each time the variable display, the big hit game and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is finished, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. Incidentally, the player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone by transmitting the player information collected in the current game to an external server, thereby a pachinko gaming machine The accumulated player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information tabulation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of changes, the number of big hits, the number of times of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, and a super reach is executed. Do.

  Next, the effect control process in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read restriction counter is “0” (122 SGS 441). If the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (122 SGS 441; Y), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag after performing the prefetching advance notice setting process (S161) Execute the process of

  If the value of the read restriction counter is any of “1” to “4” (122 SGS 441; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122 SGS 442) ). If the value of the effect control process flag is any of “0” and “2” to “7” (122 SGS 442; N), one of S 170 to S 177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag If the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122 SGS 442; Y), the value of the prefetching restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122 SGS 443), and S170 to S 177 (Segment control process flag) Execute one of the processes in FIG. As described above, by executing the processing of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after activation, execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restricted until the variable display is performed four times.

  In the feature portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the CPU for effect control 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to display the variable display four times. Although the form which regulates execution of pre-reading advance notice production over is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on pachinko gaming machine 1 having been started, the CPU 103 performs the start winning determination process (see FIG. By not executing 5), the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by a cold start or activated in a setting change state, it is related to the game progress based on the fact that the game is possible. Although the form which regulates execution of pre-reading advance notice production over 4 times of variable display is illustrated as a setting, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by cold start Regardless of whether it has been activated in the changed state, based on the fact that the game is possible, according to the volume related to the game progress, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, the RTC The setting of the effect may be set as the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 is configured to perform Super Reach A or Super Reach B as the first suggested effect. While being able to perform reach production and reach production of super reach C and super reach D as the 2nd indication production, when performing reach production of super reach C and super reach D, it is said super reach C Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D or super reach D, the notification of the title 31AK 007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect Can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes an invention 122SG described below. That is, as a pachinko gaming machine conventionally, there exist some which are described in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-42880, for example, and what is described in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and activated (the power supply to the gaming machine is started When the main board (game control board) is backed up, the command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to recover the gaming machine based on the storage to which the main board (game control board) is backed up. And a command to be outputted from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed up memory regardless of the memory to which the main board is backed up, and a state where the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command to be output from the main substrate to the effect control substrate is the same, the effect control substrate is turned on when the game machine is powered on and activated. Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 of invention 122SG which solves the problem when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation Part),
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) Part),
Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding stored contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 9-17) that can control effects based on control information (for example, effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3) output from the game control means Notification processing, notification processing during setting value change, and part performing notification processing during setting value confirmation),
Equipped with
The game control means recovers based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means as the start state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is possible to make settings by the setting means, such as a second start state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the state (for example, hot start) and the stored contents stored in the backup storage means It becomes either of the 3rd starting state (for example, setting change state) which makes it different, and outputs different control information corresponding to the starting state to the above-mentioned production control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14) In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts with a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and the pachinko gaming machine When 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control board 12 Sending setting value change start notification command)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the game control means when power supply is started. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 122SG,
Storage means for effect control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Among the information stored in the storage unit for effect control, the information to be deleted differs depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ((2) For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state)
A gaming machine having the above feature is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to carry out appropriate erasure according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a setting value change end notification command) for specifying the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on the output of the control information specifying the end of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20) As described above, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command. And a part which performs display of the message image (For example, the message image to the effect of the completion of a change of a setting value) in the image display apparatus 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the setting value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activated state or the second activated state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, it is hot) Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification processing)
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the setting value can not be set by the specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the start state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 generates a signal based on the reception of the hot start notification command). Based on the fact that the light emission for 60 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed in the start notification process and the cold start notification command is received, the effect control CPU 120 Based on the fact that the light emission for 60 seconds of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed in the start notification process and for effect control based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command. The CPU 120 emits 40 seconds of light from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process. Output of the output sound C, and a part that executes a 40-second message image in the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-19, based on the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command being received, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1", "2" and "3" as an initial symbol, or the decorative symbol is set as "4" and "5" as an initial symbol based on reception of a set value change end notification command. "" Part to be displayed in combination of "6")
A gaming machine having the feature described therein is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state it is.

Furthermore, as means 6 of invention 122SG,
When the setting value is changed in the third activation state, the game control means erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means excluding the specific information (for example, modification 122SG-1 As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear process is executed based on the change of the setting value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the data of the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. portion)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute deletion of appropriate backup information according to the change of the setting value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of invention 122SG,
The game control means comprises game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used to control the progress of the game,
The timing to erase at least a part of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-4, pachinko When activating the gaming machine 1 by cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before transmitting the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state. And the part that executes the RAM clear process at the timing after sending the setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, the game information can be erased at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 123SG described below. That is, as a pachinko gaming machine conventionally, there exist some which are described in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-42880, for example, and what is described in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and activated (the power supply to the gaming machine is started When clearing the backed up memory regardless of the memory where the main board is backed up (general start state) and when setting values of the gaming machine can be changed (set start state) If the notification mode is the same, it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and there is a problem that it is difficult to find an unauthorized setting change of the gaming machine. The Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 123SG which solves the problem when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation Part),
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) Part),
Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 and RAM 122) capable of holding stored contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Start notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start notification process shown in FIG. 9-17) capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when power supply to the game machine is started;
Equipped with
The game control means is, as the activation state, a general activation state (for example, a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start) which clears and activates the stored contents stored in the backup storage means; Have a setting activation state (for example, setting change state) that makes the setting effective,
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state by performing the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the image A part that executes display of a message image on the display device 5)
The gaming machine having the feature described is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, so that it is possible to easily find out fraud due to the setting. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 123SG,
The start notification unit can execute various types of notification according to the priority, and
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-5, during the execution of the notification during the change of the setting value with high priority) Do not execute low priority RAM clear notification)
According to this feature, notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, so that it is possible to prevent the inability to detect the fraud due to the setting.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 123SG,
The start notification means notifies the setting start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, a notification period of 60 seconds when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, pachinko gaming machine 1 Part where the notification period is 40 seconds when started in the setting change state)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate notification in a period according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 123SG,
The start notification means is
It has a first notification means (for example, the image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification means,
The first notification means informs of the setting activation state (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20);
The general notification state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the portion that performs the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R)
According to this feature, since the start notification is executed by different notification means, it is easy to recognize which start state it is.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 123SG,
The game control means performs game control (for example, by common setting as a setting relating to the game progress in the game enabled state after the setting activated state and the game enabled state after the general activated state. Since the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is possible to execute the part that regulates the execution of the advance notice effect for up to four variable displays) A machine is described, and according to this feature, occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition of setting change can be prevented by executing game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 124SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-137351, if the gaming information is unintentionally erased by the change of the setting value, the gaming machine is installed in the store or the player in which the gaming machine is installed. There is a risk of disadvantage. Therefore, as the gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 124SG for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation Part),
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) Part),
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game;
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased (for example, a portion where the CPU for effect control 120 executes the setting value change confirmation notification process in the modification 122 SG-1) When,
Equipped with
The game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when the setting value is newly set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 changes the modification 122 SG-1 To execute the RAM clear process shown in
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation to turn on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation to turn on the setting switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off) Operation) and
The setting means enables the setting change operation by the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122 SG-1, when the clear switch is ON by the CPU 103). It is changed by the setting change operation by performing the setting change completion operation after the setting change operation that has become possible after the determination (122SGSa054a; Y) and the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 becomes possible. The setting of the setting value is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1), after the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N), the part that executes the processing of 122SGSa058 ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the first set value) Part that executes setting value change confirmation notification processing based on the judgment that the notification command has been received (122 SGS 410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased by changing the setting value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 124SG,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage unit. Do not erase (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1), after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch is not operated (122SGSa054d; N), it is further determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. If it is determined that the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the setting value changing process is ended without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part to do)
A gaming machine having the feature described is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage caused to the player by erasing the game information even though the setting value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is ended without the setting change completion operation being performed (for example, as a modification 122SG-1 As shown in FIG. 9-25, a portion where the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the setting value change confirmation notification process)
The gaming machine is described, and according to this feature, the operator can recognize the operation method for preventing the deletion of the gaming information, so the gaming information is unintentionally It is possible to prevent further erasure.

Furthermore, as the means 4 of the invention 124SG,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control means satisfies the delete condition, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game stored in the game information storage means At least a part of the information is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, after the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed. Part),
The notification means performs the notification also when the deletion condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modification 122SG-2, the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5) portion)
A game machine characterized in that the game information is described can be prevented from being erased unintentionally.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 124SG,
Effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) which can control an effect based on control information outputted from the game control means;
Storage means for presentation control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the presentation control means;
Selection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not deletion in the effect control storage means is to be performed;
Equipped with
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and it is selected not to execute erasing in the effect control storage unit by the selection unit, the game information storage At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-3, a portion that clears only the RAM 102), and the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the storage means for effect control And at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-3, the RAM 1 Part to clear both the 2 and RAM122)
The gaming machine having the above feature is described, and according to this feature, whether or not deletion of the effect control storage means is executed together with the deletion in the game information storage means when the deletion condition is satisfied. Can be selected.

  As mentioned above, although the characteristic part 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention. Also included in the present invention.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON at the time of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characteristic part 122SG of the above embodiment performs the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) and then the lock switch. Although the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed when 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), and the new setting value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, it is first determined whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. Executes RAM clear processing based on setting new setting value for pachinko gaming machine 1 It may be.

  When the RAM clear process is executed based on setting of a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process as described above, as shown in FIG. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored in the address F 000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122 SGSa 052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122 SG 029.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON ( 122 SGSa 054 b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change processing (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 performs a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the operation of the setting change switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change switch 122SG052 is present (122SGSa054d).

  When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the setting value "2", which is a setting value advantageous to the player by one step than "1", is set as a temporary setting value. If the setting value stored in the address F 001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122 SG 029 is “2”, the setting value “3”, which is more advantageous to the player by one step than “2”, is tentative. It is stored in the address F 001 of the RAM 102 as a setting value. If the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If there is no operation of the setting switch in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is performed without performing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056, stores the new temporary setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it at the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). When the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, when the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF without the setting changeover switch 122SG052 being operated, the setting value change end notification command is produced It transmits to the control board 12 and ends the setting change process (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the setting value (temporary setting value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the setting value stored in the address F001. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same set value is stored in the address F 000 and the address F 001 in the RAM 102 (122 SGSa 057 c; Y), that is, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed, the set value change end notification command It transmits with respect to the board | substrate 12, and the setting change process is complete | finished (122SGS061).

  When different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 The setting value is stored in the address F000, that is, the setting value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 newly set) stored at the address F 000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM clears. The process is executed (122 SGSa 060). In the RAM clear process (122SGSa060), the same process as the RAM clear process described in FIG. 9-13 is executed, and data excluding the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 (stored in the address F001 and subsequent Clear the data). After execution of the RAM clear process (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a part of effect control main processing in the modification 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no reception of a cold start notification command as shown in FIG. 9-24 (122SGS 407; N), changes the first set value It is determined whether there is reception of a start notification command (122SGS 410a). If the first set value change start notification command has not been received (122 SGS 410a; N), the process proceeds to 122 SGS 414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the first set value change start notification command has been received (122 SGS 410 a; Y) Execute setting value change confirmation notification processing (122SGS 410b), and change the setting value to the image display device 5 to indicate that the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, or lock if the setting value is not changed An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25A).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command has been received (122 SGS 410 c). If the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122 SGS 410 C; N), it is further determined whether the set value change end notification command has been received (122 SGS 410 d). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS 410d; N), the processing of 122SGS 410b to 122SGS 410d is repeatedly performed, and the process waits until the reception of the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS 410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS 414 (see FIGS. 9-17).

  When the second set value change start notification command is received (122 SGS 410 c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change informing process for notifying that the set value change operation is in progress. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not there is reception of a setting value change end notification command (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS 411a; N), the processing of 122SG 411 and 122SGS 411a is repeatedly performed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, when the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS 411a; Y), it is determined whether the setting value specification command is received (122SGS 411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122 SGS 411 b; N), the processing proceeds to 122 SGS 414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the setting value designation command is received (122 SGS 411 b; Y), the received setting value designation command is received. The setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value stored in the address F 000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified setting value is set value information (“1” to “3” according to the setting value) The value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as the value of (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122 SGS 408 (see FIG. 9-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, whereby a clerk or the like at the game arcade turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051, and the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. When 1 is activated, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), in the image display device 5, changing the setting value indicates that the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared, and the setting value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  As described above, when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns the lock switch 122 SG 051 OFF while the message image 122 SG 005 M 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The decorative design is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as an initial design on the image display device 5 without changing the setting value of and without clearing the RAM 102. On the other hand, when the clerk or the like at the game arcade turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 In the setting change state, display of an image on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are notified that the setting value is being changed.

  Then, in the setting change state, the clerk etc. at the game arcade turns the lock switch 122 SG 051 off without setting a new set value, or the clerk at the game arcade etc. is identical to the original set value as the new set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed, and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial pattern in combination of “1”, “2” and “3”. Furthermore, when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade sets a new set value (changes the set value) in the setting change state and turns the lock switch 122SG051 off, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (E), the set value Is cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed as the initial symbol on the image display 5 as a combination of "4", "5" and "6".

  Further, in the modification 122SG-1, the setting value is changed to the image display device 5 by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051. Although the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn the lock switch 122SG051 OFF when the set value is not changed, the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed as an example, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modification 122SG-2, a clerk etc. in the game arcade activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the clear switch is turned ON, thereby displaying an image. By activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the device 5 by cold start, the gaming information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared. That and that, if it does not start a pachinko game machine 1 at cold start an instruction to reboot the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  By doing this, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start when, for example, the clear switch is turned on erroneously in order to activate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by hot start, for example. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

  Further, in the modification 122SG-1 and the modification 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state or activated by cold start, the image display device 5 displays the message image 122SG005M1 or the message image 122SG005M2 Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is displayed by displaying the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message on the image display device 5 Whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state or cold start may be performed for confirmation of whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Further, in the modification 122SG-1, the setting value is changed to the image display device 5 by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051. Although the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn the lock switch 122SG051 OFF when the set value is not changed, the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed as an example, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modification 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the change of the setting value. If the image display device 5 has changed the set value or the RAM 102 has been cleared, While displaying a message image 122SG 005 M3 including the option of clearing the RAM 122 according to the change of the fixed value and the clearing of the RAM 102, the RAM 122 is cleared by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Alternatively, the selection may be accepted.

  When the clear of the RAM 122 is selected by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clear process to clear the other information except for the setting value information in the RAM 122 (resultantly If both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are cleared) and the clear of the RAM 122 is not selected by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG in the above embodiment, the cold start notification command and the setting for the effect control board 12 are set at the same timing when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 by cold start and when starting the setting change state. Although the form which performs RAM clear processing at timing before transmitting a value change start notice command was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, For example, as a modification 122SG-4, pachinko gaming machine 1 If you want to start by cold start, execute the RAM clear process at the timing before sending the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and start the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, effect control Timing after transmitting the set value change start notification command to the substrate 12 (more specifically When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, such as executing the RAM clear process after transmitting the setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, after changing the setting value) The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different depending on the case of activation in the setting change state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the feature portion 122SG in the above embodiment, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and when it is started by the setting change state. In the embodiment, the RAM clear notification process is performed to notify the user of the event (RAM clear notification is executed), but the present invention is not limited to this. When notifying that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (starting notification during setting value change), each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification If priority is set to and notification with high priority (for example, notification during setting value change) is executed, notification with low priority (for example, RAM clear notification) It may not be line.

  Thus, when giving priority to each alerting | reporting, you may perform alerting | reporting with low priority, after execution of alerting | reporting with high priority. In this case, by performing notification with low priority in a shorter period than when notification with high priority is not performed, it is possible to prevent the period for performing notification from being long. May be

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not executed at all when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 At the same time as the above-mentioned notification of clearing the RAM, notification of changing the setting value, notification of confirming the setting value, and various activation notifications, a confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed. . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, since the start notification of 60 seconds is executed, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the setting value is changed in addition to the start notification of 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of the setting value and the start notification of 40 seconds. The confirmation operation of can be performed.

  Incidentally, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, A setting value change start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, a setting value confirmation start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command or the like may be executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (the effect control board 12) receives. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 from the time when the setting value change start notification command is received, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 In this case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, priority may be given to the notification that the setting value is being changed, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be performed.

  In the feature portion 122SG of the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the new setting value is reflected in the game as it is by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new setting value is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming A new set value may be reflected on the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start. In addition, when a new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is performed. After moving the movable body 32 slightly from the origin position toward the rendering position, the executable operation is performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 As a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, after moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the rendering position as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, confirmation requiring a relatively long period such as moving the movable body 32 again to the origin position An action may be performed. By doing this, it is possible to shorten the time required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the setting value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information which is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this. The specific information not included may include the setting of the RTC, an error history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above embodiment, although the setting value as the specific information not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary setting value as the information to be cleared, the game information and the like are illustrated, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that is not cleared such as a setting value, and the other RAM is a temporary setting value, a game Information to be cleared may be stored. By doing this, the other RAM (provisional setting value, game information, etc. is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state). Whether or not to clear the existing RAM) can be made different. Furthermore, an area for storing specific information not cleared in the RAM 102 and an area for storing information to be cleared may be provided.

  Further, as described above, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, a static random access memory (SRAM) is connected with a backup battery connected to the RAM for storing specific information that is not cleared such as setting values. On the other hand, by using RAM that stores temporary setting values and game information etc. as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory), clear data with higher importance than other data such as setting values. You may make it memorize | store without.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the above embodiment, although the embodiment in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply substrate is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is not limited to the main substrate 11. It may be mounted on This eliminates the need to newly install a clear switch on the existing power supply substrate, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the feature portion 122SG exemplifies a mode in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying setting values on the main substrate 11 is mounted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main substrate A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11, so that the change operation of the setting value can be easily performed.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the form is shown in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the setting value is mounted on the main substrate 11, but the present invention is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio etc. in the machine 1, the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG in the above embodiment, the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting change switch 122SG052 are provided on the main substrate 11 to exemplify a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG in the above embodiment, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-11, when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, it is the same as activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 by cold start Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both of the setting value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the embodiment, the setting value 1 is set as the setting value which is most advantageous to the player, and the setting value 3 is set as the setting value which is most disadvantageous to the player. (The set value 3 is set as the most advantageous set value for the game arcade), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and set value 3 may be set as the set value most advantageous to the player.

  In particular, in the characteristic part 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000, thereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is most advantageous to the player. For this reason, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clear process (see FIG. 9-13 (A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102, etc., thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to set the setting value 1 incorrectly. It is assumed to set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays a game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an advantageous state, and the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the embodiment, the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image period in the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120. Although the embodiment shows an example in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (i.e., control relating to notification at start-up is different), the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the notification at the time of activation described above, the initial symbol (see FIGS. 9-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready to play a game. Control related to effects such as the fact that etc. are different (the state of the presentation mode and the stage of presentation after the game becomes possible in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are different), and confirmation of the movable body 32 Whether to execute the work, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. In other words, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control that is at least partially different among the target controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, etc. .

  In addition, although a pachinko gaming machine has been applied as an example of a gaming machine in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above embodiment, a game can be performed by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, gaming value Can be started, and a variable display result can be derived to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and one game is ended by the variable display result derived on the image display device The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which winning can be generated according to the result.

  Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as “setting change in progress” is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 is notified that the setting change is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and such notification may be made on the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). In this case, for example, the main board 11 can specify a signal that can specify that the setting is being changed to an external management device such as a hole management computer, for example, information The notification may be given to an external device by outputting from the terminal board, and further, the main board 11 (CPU 103) is connected to the main board 11 By controlling the display and lighting conditions such as indicators and lamps, it may be recognizable informed externally that is being set changes. For example, all the display devices and lamps connected to the main substrate 11 may be lighted. In order to distinguish between the setting change and the other states (playable states), it is preferable to cause the indicator or lamp connected to the main substrate 11 to emit light in a mode different from that during normal game play .

  Further, not only when the setting is being changed but also when the setting is being confirmed, the main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify or is connected to the main board 11 The setting confirmation may be notified from outside so as to be able to be recognized from the outside by controlling the display or lighting state of the display, the lamp or the like.

  As described above, when the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, for example, the setting change is being performed or the setting confirmation is also performed for a model that does not have the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine. It can be recognized from the outside that it is medium.

  When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp or LED may be provided to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B connected to the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) for the purpose of preventing cost increase by providing these dedicated lamps and LEDs etc., normal symbol display Special display modes that are not displayed during normal game play (variable display, non-variable display (standby), big hit game, etc.), for example, blinking display or special display pattern (special special The notification may be made by lighting and displaying the information in FIG.

  Also, in the case of providing a dedicated lamp or LED, etc., in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, for example, An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the normal symbol display device 20.

  In addition, when notifying both of the fact that the setting is being changed and the fact that the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) by one notification mode (the same output signal). It may be possible to specify from any of the states from the outside by notifying (notifying to the outside) each of these states in individual notification modes (different output signals).

  In addition, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is in the process of changing the setting or confirming the setting by lighting / flashing a dedicated lamp or LED, the display control unit in the effect control board 12 The setting is being changed by lighting / flashing a dedicated lamp or LED immediately without waiting for the rising edge of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as “setting being changed” to be started in the image display device 5) It is possible to notify that there is a certain thing or setting confirmation.

(Description of the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the feature part 127SG of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 127SG is a gaming machine capable of changing the effect that can be performed during the variable display by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, the feature part 127SG of the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 10A is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a presentation control command used in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown to FIG. 10-1 (A), command 8001H is a 1st fluctuation | variation start command which designates the fluctuation | variation start in the special figure game using the 1st special figure in the 1st special symbol display apparatus 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is displayed on the display device 5 so as to be variably displayed on the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in response to the variable symbol display of the special symbol game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in the feature section 127SG (B) of the present embodiment, the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is “off” or “big hit” or Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probably big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change big hit" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of the result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit" and the result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating stop of variation (decision) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither time reduction control nor probability change control is performed, and time reduction control The second game state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which the probability change control is not performed is set. In addition, command 9502H is set as a third game state specification command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability change control is performed but time reduction control is not performed (high probability low base state, time reduction none probability change state), command 9503H is time reduction control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction definite change state) in which the control is performed together.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or short open end big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22 B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol display device 4B was satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special view pending storage count in order to display the special view pending storage count in an identifiable manner in the first pending storage display area 5D or the like described later. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second pending storage display area 5U or the like described later. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variation display result is "big hit" or "small hit" as a result of the winning determination, and the determination result of the big hit type (certain change, non definite change or sudden confirmation). is there. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 is any one of “non-reach”, “super reach”, and “other” variation pattern as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number MR1 for special display display result determination, a random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and a variation pattern determination Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for determining the common drawing display result is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 updates random number data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG 154 shown in FIG. 10-6, for example. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for the special view display result determination determines whether or not to control the variable display results such as the special symbol etc in the special view game to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state as "big hit" or "small hit". For example, it takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" as any of the "probably variable big hit A", "probably variable big hit B" and "non-probable change". It is a random value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative pattern to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and for example “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of 997 ".

  The random number value MR4 for determining the common drawing display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is to be “per common drawing” or “to be out of common drawing”. It is a random number value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 10-3 shows a variation pattern in the feature part 127SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non reach" and the case of "reach". Also, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern"), The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "reach deviation fluctuation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit (special hit) variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided in the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... is similar to the super reach. As shown, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 10-3, with regard to the special view fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment, super reach α and super reach β that are super reach fluctuation patterns. It is set shorter than. In addition, super reach production of super reach β is executed for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the characteristic portion 127SG of this embodiment is executed. The special pattern fluctuation time is set longer in the case of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed than in the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed.

  In the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” in the order of the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the normal reach change pattern and the super reach change pattern, the longer the change time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, as described later, for example, the type of fluctuation pattern such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining it first, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, a random value for variation pattern type determination is provided, and these variations are determined. A fluctuation pattern belonging to a fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type since the fluctuation pattern type is determined first from the random number value for pattern type judgment It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  In addition to the program for game control, various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control shown in FIG. ing. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 11 and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. The table data etc. which comprise the fluctuation pattern table which stores a kind are memorize | stored.

  FIG. 10D shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first and second special views is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the second special view may use individual display result determination tables.

  The display result determination table is determined as a variation display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" or whether the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" or not It is a table referred to in order to make a decision based on the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination.

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, the special view display result according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) or the probability changing state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judgment is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "off".

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special view display result determination determines whether the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not the result is to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit". In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), more determination values are “big hit” than in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special view display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" when in the normal state or the time reduction state (low probability state). Then, compared with the probability (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability that it is determined that the special image display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" is higher (about 1/30 in the present embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state (high probability state), there is a probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state to be higher.

  In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to the "small hit" special figure display results regardless of whether the gaming state is the definite change state or not. Thereby, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of whether or not it is a definite change state, the probability that it is determined to control the special view display result as the "small hit" to the small hit gaming state (characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment Then 1/200) is constant.

  FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the big hit classification determination table of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", the big hit classification may be any of plural types based on the random number MR2 for big hit classification determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In the big hit classification determination table, the special symbol on which the variation display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for the big hit classification judgment according to whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 10-5 (B). In the present embodiment, high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state as the jackpot type. There are set a definite variation big hit A or a definite variation big hit B to shift to a high probability high base state, and a non probability variation big hit to execute only the time reduction control to shift to a low probability high base condition after the big hit gaming state ends.

  In the big hit gaming state due to "probable big hit A" and the big hit gaming state due to "non-probable big hit", as described above, 16 rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player 16 rounds) is a big hit repeated. On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state by "probable big hit B", as described above, five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is a big hit. Therefore, "probably big hit A" may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R), and "probably big hit B" may be referred to as 5 rounds (5R).

  The high probability control and the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the definite variation big hit A or the definite variation big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurred again is the definite variation big hit A or the definite variation big hit B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big hit gaming state ends, so the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state It is a so-called continuous state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time reduction control to be executed after the end of the big hit gaming state due to "non-deterministic big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) or the predetermined number of special figure games It ends by becoming a big hit game state before is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit classification determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), “probably big hit A” and “prone big hit B” depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of is different. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be any of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special drawing game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. And if the jackpot type is determined to be any of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. And, it is possible to make the proportion of determining the jackpot type “a certainty big hit B” with a small number of rounds different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is controlled to the short open jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probably variable big hit B". In the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequency of the short-term opening big hit state with few winning balls obtained is avoided to avoid frequent occurrence of the game openness It can be prevented.

  In the setting example of the big hit classification judgment table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot classification of “non-probability change” is whether the fluctuation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing Because it is considered to be the same regardless of whether it is the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a jackpot of the probability variation is the same regardless of whether the variation feature is the first special figure or the second special figure It is assumed.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to the "probable variation big hit B" differs depending on whether the variation feature is the first special view or the second special view, "certainly variation big hit A" The assignment of the judgment value to “” also differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the variation special figure is the second special figure for “probable variation big hit A” with a large number of rounds. Is set to be easier to determine than the case of the first special view.

  In addition, even when the fluctuation special drawing is the second special drawing, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special drawing is the first special drawing is assigned to the big hit type of “probably variable big hit B” May be For example, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, a smaller judgment value may be assigned to the jackpot type “probable variation big hit B” as compared to the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, determination of the jackpot type may be performed with reference to common table data.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is "big hit", and the small figure display result is "small hit" And a variation pattern determination table for small hit, which is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for removal, which is used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is “off”. , Are prepared in advance.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit, each fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. In the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “probability big hit A” or “probable big hit B”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is “non-probable big hit”. In this case, the super reach α is assigned so that it is easy to be determined, and when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it does not become “positively variable big hit A” or “positively variable big hit B” This can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  In the small hit variation pattern determination table, all variation values within the range of random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can be determined for the variation pattern (PC1-1) for the special hit (small hit). It is assigned as a value.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, it is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the number of pending storages is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. If the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed And the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table D used in advance.

  In the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A, the non-reach outlier fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), the super reach With respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation, a predetermined random value is allocated as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total of 2 to 4 pending storages, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and a super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the fluctuation pattern (PA 1-4) of shortening, non-reach loss, corresponding fluctuation pattern (PA 2-1) of normal reach, fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation during time-saving control (PA2-2) The super reach β is assigned a predetermined random number value as a determination value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 10-3, the fluctuation time of the non-reachout fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reachout fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern is The fluctuation time is shorter in the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) than in (PA1-2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach out of bounds variation pattern is determined so that the variation time is short, so that the pending storage is easily digested and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 In addition to making a start-up winning when not being held, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start-up that is not made pending storage, and when the number of pending storages is reduced, the fluctuation time is not long and the non-reach is not shifted By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fluctuation display not being executed by lengthening the time of the fluctuation display.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least the data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special map process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 127SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. It is done. The game control data holding area 127SG150 shown in FIG. 10-6 includes a first special view hold storage unit 127SG151A, a second special view hold storage unit 127SG151B, a common view hold storage unit 127SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 127SG152. The game control timer setting unit 127SG153, the game control counter setting unit 127SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 127SG155.

  In the first special view reserve storage unit 127SG151A, although the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, it has not been started yet. The reserve data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 127SG151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls Holds the numeric data indicating the random number value MR1 for special display display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination etc. As the storage number until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 127SG 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 127SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not been started yet The reserve data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 127SG151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the game balls Holds the numeric data indicating the random number value MR1 for special display display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination etc. , And the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 127SG151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  The game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball having passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the second start winning port. The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 127SG 151C stores the holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 127SG151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the game ball passes the passage gate 41 For example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 127SG 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 127SG 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 127SG 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 127SG 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 127SG 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 127SG 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 127SG 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 127SG 154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numeric data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 127SG 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 127SG 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Further, as an area for holding various data used to control the rendering operation, the RAM 122 mounted on the presentation control board 12 is, for example, a presentation control data holding area 127SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). Is provided. The effect control data holding area 127SG190 shown in FIG. 10-7A includes an effect control flag setting unit 127SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 127SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 127SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 127SG194. Have.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 127SG191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 127SG191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 127SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 127SG192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 127SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 127SG 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 127SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start-up winning time reception command buffer 127SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 127SG194. In the start winning combination reception command buffer 127SG194A, storage areas (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4” corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages of the first special view pending storage A corresponding area) and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display are provided. In addition, the start winning combination reception command buffer 127SG194A stores storage areas (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of pending storages of the second special view pending storage. And a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure in the variable display. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variation category designation A command and four commands of a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special view reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special view reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A are these start opening winning combination specification commands, symbol specification commands, variation category specification commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special drawing holding storage in association with the holding storage number notification command.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the topmost pending storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. The memory contents of the buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” storing the contents of the pending storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is to be cleared in the special processing per-figure waiting process which is executed when finishing the process.

  Furthermore, in the start winning prize reception command buffer 127SG194A of the present embodiment, the advance notice notice effect such as the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, the chance eye notice effect, etc. in the advance notice setting process (see FIG. 10-12). With a preread undecided flag indicating that it is undecided whether or not to execute, and a pending display advance effect flag capable of specifying whether or not the execution of the on hold display advance effect is determined and the display pattern of the on hold display advance effect , Whether or not the execution of the background change notice effect is determined, and whether or not the execution of the chance change notice effect is determined whether or not the background change notice effect flag can specify the display pattern (background image) of the background change notice effect Opportunity eye notice effect flag that can specify the display pattern (also combined as a chance eye of the decoration pattern) of the eye notice effect production, and the change operation of the effect mode is invalid And effect mode change operation restriction display effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag capable of specifying the effect pattern of the effect, and stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special view reserve storage and the second special view reserve storage A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry), as can be done. In addition, although details will be described later, with regard to the suspension display notice effect, the gaming state is achieved by making the color of the suspension display displayed in the first suspension storage display area 127SG005D provided in the lower part of the image display device 5 blue and red. Is a pre-reading notice effect for giving notice that the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the background change notice effect is from the ordinary daytime image of the background image displayed on the image display 5 to the evening or night image It is a pre-reading advance notice effect to give notice that the skill state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by changing, and when the chance eye advance notice effect is derived and displayed the decoration symbol in the variable display executed before the notice object In addition, it is a pre-reading advance notice for giving notice that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by deriving and displaying the decorative symbol in a specific combination such as "135" or "246".

  In addition, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect will be described later during execution of background change notice effect or chance eye notice effect, during change display for executing background change notice effect or chance eye notice effect, during change indication of super reach, etc. An operation restriction display image 127SG005c indicating that the effect mode can not be changed when a change operation of the effect mode by the stick controller 31A is received during a period in which the effect mode change is restricted (see FIG. 10-25). It is an effect that predicts that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the display mode of.

  In the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the first hold storage display area 127SG005D and the second hold storage display area 127SG005U are set in two places on the left and right under the display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-23 (refer to FIG. 10-23), in the first reserve storage display area 127SG005D and the second reserve storage display area 127SG005U, the special figure game is supported based on the data stored in the start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A. A hold display for specifying the number of pending storages of the variable display (the number of special view pending storages) is displayed.

  FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S101 of FIG. 5 as the start winning determination process. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first start opening switch 22A based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (127 SGS 111). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (127 SGS 111; Y), the number of first special view pending storages which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the first special view has a predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether or not “4” as the upper limit number of storages (127 SGS 112). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value which is the stored value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG154, for example. For example, when the first special view storage number is not the upper limit in 127SG112 (127SGS112; N), the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 127SG155 is set to “1” (127SGS113) .

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is off at 127 SGS 111 (127 SGS 111; N), or when the number of first special view reservation storage reaches the upper limit at 127 SGS 112 (127 S GS 112; Y), variable winning ball device 6 B Whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on is determined based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the (127 SGS 114). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (127 SGS 114; Y), the number of second special view pending storages which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the second special view has a predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether or not “4” as the upper limit storage number is obtained (127 SGS 115). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special-image storage number by reading the second-storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG154, for example. For example, when the second special drawing reserve memory number is not the upper limit value at 127 SG 115 (127 SGS 115; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” (127 SGS 116) .

  After one of the processes of 127 SGS 113 and 127 SGS 116 is executed, the number of special figure storages according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (127 SGS 117). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending storages is also updated so as to add one (127 SGS 118). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of 127 SGS 118, the CPU 103 determines, among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 127 SG 154, the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination and the big hit type determination. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (127 SGS 119). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the top of the free entry in the special view storage section according to the start port buffer value by being set as storage information (127 SGS 120). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, while the first special image storage unit 127 SG 151 A stores numerical data indicating random number values MR 1 to MR 3, the starting opening buffer value is “2”. Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored in second special image storage unit 127SG 151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment and the random number value MR2 for the big hit classification judgment is whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" Is used to determine the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 127 SGS 119 to extract numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variation display mode including the variation display result of the special symbol or the decoration pattern or the variation display time.

  Following the processing of 127 SGS 120, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (127 SGS 121). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning combination designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning combination designation command is performed. The start opening prize winning specification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Be done.

  Following the processing of 127 SGS 121, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (127 SGS 122). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 Make settings for (127 SGS 123). For example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed to transmit the main storage 11 to the effect control board 12 after the special symbol process process is finished. Be done.

  After the processing of 127 SGS 123 is performed, it is determined whether or not the starting opening buffer value is “1” (127 SGS 124). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (Y in 127 SGS 124), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (127 SGS 125), and the process proceeds to 127 SGS 114. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 127 SGS 124), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (127 SGS 126), and the starting winning processing is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  FIG. 10-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed by 127 SGS 122 of FIG. 10-8 as random number value determination processing at the time of winning. In the feature part 127SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (the change display result of the special symbol) of the special symbol display processing (S112 of FIG. 5) It is judged whether or not the big hit game state is controlled as "big hit", and whether or not the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of the 127 SGS 122 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). It is determined whether or not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special figure display result, or whether the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode with super reach etc. Do. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display, that is, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball entering the start winning opening Before, it is determined that the special view display result will be "big hit" or "small hit", and which category of the variable display mode of the decorative symbol variation display mode will be, based on the determination result As described later, the pre-reading notice effect such as the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect is performed by the control CPU 120 and the like.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), the CPU 103 first checks pachinko gaming, for example, by confirming the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 127SG 152 or the like. The present gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (127 SGS 131). The CPU 103 identifies the definite variation state when the definite variation flag is on, and identifies the short time status when the definite variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off. At times, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

  Following the processing of 127 SGS 131, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-4 is selected and set (127 SG 132). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination extracted at 127 SGS 119 in FIG. 10-8 is within the predetermined big hit determination range (127 SGS 133). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special display display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 127 SGS 132 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be "big hit".

  If it is determined at 127 SGS 133 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, if it is determined not to be a big hit at the time of variable display (127 SGS 133; N), the special image display extracted at 127 SGS 119 in FIG. It is determined whether the numerical data indicating the result determination random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (127 SGS 134). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special character display result of “small hit” in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 127 SGS 132 are set, and the CPU 103 sets random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the two with one another. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the small hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the small hitting determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be "small hit".

  If it is determined at 127 SGS 134 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not made at the time of the variable display (127 SGS 134; N), the variable display result is "off" The transmission setting of the designated symbol designation command is executed (127 SGS 135), and it is determined whether the short time flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the short time state (127 SGS 136). If the time saving flag is not set (127 SGS 136; N), set the variation pattern determination table A for losing and proceed to 127 SGS 144 (127 SG 137). If the time saving flag is set (127 SGS 136; Y) The fluctuation pattern determination table D is set and the process proceeds to 127 SGS 144 (127 SGS 138).

  Note that the release variation pattern determination table A is a release variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending storages is one or less. Further, the variation pattern determination table for disconnection D is a variation pattern determination table for disconnection which is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern determination table A for removal and the variation pattern determination table D for removal, the variation pattern determination table for deviation used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. B and a variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but among these variation pattern determination tables A to C for deviation, variation for deviation In the pattern determination table A, values from 0 to A within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination are allocated to non-reach variation patterns, and in the variation pattern determination tables B and C for loss A value exceeding 0 to A within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation patternOn the other hand, in the out-of-plane fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, values from B to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach among the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination.

  For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A in 127 SGS 144 described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach must be non-reach or super even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since the variation pattern of the reach is obtained, the determination at the time of the starting winning combination is made using the variation pattern determination table A for losing.

  If it is determined at 127 SGS 134 that it is within the small hit determination value range, that is, if it is determined to be a small hit at the time of variable display (127 SGS 134; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the small hit The process is executed (127 SGS 139), the small hit variation pattern determination table is set as a table for determining the small hit variation pattern, and the process proceeds to 127 SGS 144 (127 SGS 140).

  Also, if it is determined in 127 SGS 133 that it is within the big hit determination range, that is, if it is determined to be a big hit when fluctuating display (127 SGS 133; Y), big hit based on random number value MR2 for big hit type determination. The type is determined (127 SGS 141). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special view (the “first special view” corresponding to “1” or the “second special view” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start opening buffer value. The table data for determining the big hit type is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

  In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol specification command according to the big hit classification which is decided in 127 SGS 141 is executed (127 SGS 142), the big hit fluctuation pattern decision table is set as the table in order to decide the big hit fluctuation pattern to plural ones Proceed to 127 SGS 144 (127 SGS 143).

  Then, the 127 SGS 144 determines the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR 3 using the set variation pattern determination table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR 3 for variation pattern determination (127 SGS 144 ). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), when at least the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode of "non-reach" is common regardless of the total number of pending storages. A fluctuation category, a fluctuation category that is a fluctuation display mode of "super reach", and a fluctuation category of "other" that is a fluctuation display mode other than "non reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) It may be determined based on the numerical value MR3 whether or not the variable category is determined.

  Then, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result by the process of 127 SGS 144 (127 SGS 145), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S75 of FIG. 6 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-10, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main substrate 11 transmitted via the relay substrate 15 by confirming the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether there is a command (127 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no reception command (127 SGS 221; N), the command analysis processing is ended.

  If there is a received command at 127 SGS 221 (127 SGS 221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening winning a prize specified command (127 SGS 222 ). Then, when it is the first starting opening winning combination designating command (127 SGS 221; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (127 SGS 223). For example, in the process of 127 SGS 223, if the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in effect control timer setting unit 127 SG 192 Good.

  If the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command at 127 SGS 222 (127 SGS 222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (127 SGS 224). Then, when it is the second starting opening winning combination designating command (127 SGS 224; Y), the second holding storage number notification waiting time is set (127 SGS 225). For example, in the process of 127 SGS 225, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command at 127 SGS 224 (127 SGS 224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command (127 SGS 226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at 127 SGS 226 (127 SGS 226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command (127 SGS 227). If the received command is not a variation category command at 127 SGS 227 (127 SGS 227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command (127 SGS 228). Then, if it is the first pending storage number notification command (127 SGS 228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (127 SGS 229).

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at 127 SGS 228 (127 SGS 228; N), it is determined whether the receiving command is the second pending storage number notification command (127 SGS 230). Then, if it is the second pending storage number notification command (127 SGS 230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (127 SGS 231).

  Then, after executing any of the processes of 127 SGS 229 and 127 SGS 231, “1” is set in the pre-reading undecided flag of the stored entry to indicate that it is undecided whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be executed. (127 SGS 232).

  If the received command is a symbol designation command at 127 SGS 226 (127 SGS 226; Y), if the received command is a variation category command at 127 SGS 227 (127 SGS 227; Y), or any one of the processes of 127 SGS 223, 127 SGS 225, 127 SGS 232 is executed. After that, the reception command is stored at the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A (not shown) (127SGS233), and the process returns to the processing of 127SGS221.

  If the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the pending storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be stored sequentially from the top of the free space in the start winning at reception command buffer 127SG194A.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in 127 SGS 230 (127 SGS 230; N), after setting according to the other received commands (127 SGS 234), the process returns to 127 SGS 221.

  10-11 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-11, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading advance effect setting process (S161), and then, based on the fact that the execution of the on-hold display notice effect described later is determined. Hold display notice effect notification execution processing (127 SGS 162) for notifying the start of the hold display notice effect, and start the hold display in the first hold storage display area 127005 D and the second hold storage display area 127 SG 005 U of the image display device 5 Hold display update processing (127 SGS 163) for updating the display according to the storage content of the winning reception command buffer 127 SG 194 A, and background image update processing (127 SGS 164) for updating (changing) the background image displayed on the image display device 5 , Effect mode change process for changing the effect that can be performed ( 27SGS 165), effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process (127 SGS 166) for determining the execution of effect mode change operation restriction display effect mode change operation operation restriction display for performing the effect mode change operation restriction display effect The effect execution process (127SGS167) and the volume change process (127SGS168) for changing the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed, and the processes of S170 to S177 are performed.

  In the upper right portion of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode notification image 127S effect mode notification image 127SG005bG005b (see FIG. 10-25 (A)) is displayed, and the player By visually recognizing the above, it is possible to grasp the current rendering mode.

  FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13 are flowcharts showing an example of the advance notice setting process in the effect control process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start-up winning reception command buffer 127 SG 194 A (126 SGS 301), and whether there is an entry whose pre-reading undecided flag is “1” It is determined whether or not there is an entry in the start-up winning reception command buffer 127SG 194A for which it is not determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect (127 SGS 302).

  If there is no entry whose preread undecided flag is “1” (127 SGS 302; N), the preread advance notice setting process is ended. If there is an entry in which the preread undecided flag is “1” (127 SGS 302; Y), it is determined whether or not any pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (127 SGS 303). It should be noted that whether or not any pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, in the start-up winning reception command buffer 127SG194A, one of the hold display notice effect flag, the background change notice effect flag, and the chance eye notice effect flag It may be determined by whether or not a numerical value other than "0" is set.

  If any pre-reading preview effect is already being executed (127 SGS 303; Y), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 320, and if any pre-reading preview effect is not performed (127 SGS 303; N), the entry (pre-reading undecided) It is determined whether or not the entry whose flag is “1” is an entry of the first special view pending storage (127 SGS 304). If the entry is an entry of the second special view pending storage (127 SGS 304; N), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 320, and if the entry is an entry of the first special view pending storage (127 SGS 304; Y), It is determined whether or not the buffer number is any one of "1-2" to "1-4", that is, whether or not at least one first special view pending storage exists before the entry (127 SGS 305) .

  If the buffer number of the entry is "1-1" (127 SGS 305; N), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 320, and if the buffer number of the entry is any one of "1-2" to "1-4" (127 SGS 305; Y) determines whether the gaming state is the high base state (127 SGS 306). If the gaming state is the high base state (127 SGS 306; Y), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 320, and if the gaming state is the low base state (127 SGS 306; N), the variable display result already has a reserve memory for big hit or small hit. It is determined whether or not (127 SGS 306a). If there is a reserve storage in which the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit (127 SGS 306a; Y), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 320. If there is no reserve storage in which a variation display result is a big hit or a small hit (127 SGS 306 a; Y), It is determined whether the value of the effect mode flag indicating the mode is "1" (127 SGS 307). Although the details will be described later, if the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, the effect mode is an A mode in which the pending display notice effect and the background change notice effect can be executed as the advance notice effect. If the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, it indicates that the effect mode is the B mode in which the on-hold display notice effect and the chance eye notice effect can be executed as the advance read notice effect.

  If the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, that is, if the effect mode is B mode, the process proceeds to 127 SGS 324, and if the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, that is, if the effect mode is A mode Then, according to the symbol designating command and the change category of the entry, the presence or absence of pre-reading notice effect execution and the effect type of pre-reading notice effect (pending display notice effect or background change notice effect) are determined (127 SGS 308).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the non-execution of the advance read notice effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and 30% Determine the execution of the pending display notice effect at a rate of 70%, and determine the execution of the background change notice effect at a rate of 70%. In addition, if the symbol designation command is "missing" and the change category is "non-reach", non-execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution of pending display notice effect at a rate of 5%. It decides and decides execution of background change announcement production with ratio of 0%. In addition, if the symbol designation command is "loss" and the variation category is "other", non-execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%. And decide the execution of the background change notice effect at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the symbol specification command is "loss" and the variation category is "super reach", the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect at a rate of 25%. It decides and decides execution of background change announcement production with ratio of 10%. When the symbol designation command is "small hit", the non-execution of the advance read notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

  That is, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, when execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in A mode, control is performed to the big hit gaming state than when non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined. When the execution of the background change notice effect is determined while the rate is high, the proportion controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than the case where the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined.

  Returning to FIG. 10-12, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect has been determined in 127 SGS 308 (127 SGS 309). If it is determined that the pre-read advance notice effect is not performed in 127 SGS 308 (127 SGS 309; N), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 320, and if it is determined to execute the pre-read advance notice effect in 127 S S S 308 (127 SGS 309; Y) It is determined whether or not execution of the advance notice effect has been determined (127 SGS 310). When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect (127 SGS 310; Y), the display pattern (the display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined according to the symbol designating command and the change category of the entry. Do.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), when the symbol designating command of the entry is "big hit", the display pattern of the pending display notice effect at a rate of 30% (the display mode of the pending display ) Is determined to be blue, and the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be red at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol specification command is "missing" and the variation category is "non-reach", the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 95%, and 5% The display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display advance notice effect is determined to be red in proportion. In addition, when the symbol specification command is "missing" and the variation category is "other", the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 80%, and the rate of 20% The display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display advance notice effect is determined to be red at. In addition, when the symbol specification command is "missing" and the variation category is "super reach", the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be blue at a ratio of 75%, 25% The display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display advance notice effect is determined to be red in proportion.

  That is, when the execution of the on-hold notice effect is determined in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, the on-hold display is displayed in red as the on-hold display advance effect, rather than in the case where the on-hold display is displayed in blue. It is controlled to be a big hit gaming state at a high rate.

  Returning to FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display advance effect determined at 127 SGS 311 to the hold display advance effect flag of the entry. In addition, when blue is determined as the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display advance effect, “1” is set to the hold display advance effect flag, and the display pattern of the hold display advance effect (the hold display When red is determined as the display mode, “2” may be set to the hold display advance effect flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” corresponding to the non-execution of the background change notice effect in the background change notice effect flag of the entry and sets the chance eye notice effect flag to the non-execution of the entry notice. “0” corresponding to execution is set (127 SGS 313, 127 SGS 314), and it is determined whether the value of the effect mode flag is “1” indicating that the mode is A mode (127 SGS 314 a).

  If the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, that is, if the effect mode is the A mode (127 SGS 314 a; Y), the on-hold display notice effect for notifying the execution of the on-hold display advance effect by the display of the character A Set notification A execution decision flag and proceed to 127 SGS 323 (127 SGS 314 b), when the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, that is, when the effect mode is B mode (127 SGS 314 a; N), hold display notice effect The suspension display advance notice notification B execution determination flag for notifying the execution of the character B by the display of the character B is set, and the process proceeds to 127 SGS 323 (127 SGS 314 c).

  In 127SGS 310, when execution of background change notice effect is determined in 127SGS 308 (127SGS 310; N), a background image in background change notice effect according to the symbol designating command and the change category of the entry (background image of change destination ) (127 SGS 315).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the background image in the background change notice effect at a rate of 30% (the background image of the change destination) ) Is determined as the image of the evening, and the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the image of the night at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designating command is “lost” and the variation category is “non-reach”, the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the image of the evening at a ratio of 95% The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the image of the evening at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is “lost” and the variation category is “other”, the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as an image of the evening at a rate of 80%, 20% The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the image of the evening at a ratio of.
In addition, when the symbol designation command is “lost” and the variation category is “super reach”, the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the image of the evening at a rate of 95%. The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at a percentage of%. The display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display advance notice effect is determined to be red. In addition, when the symbol designation command is “lost” and the variation category is “other”, the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as an image of the evening at a rate of 80%, 20% The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at a ratio of.

  In addition, when the symbol designation command is “lost” and the variation category is “super reach”, the background image (background image of change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined to be the image of the evening at a ratio of 75%. The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at a percentage of%.

  That is, when the execution of the background change notice effect is determined in the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the background change notice effect is changed from a daytime image described later to a nighttime image. In the case of a change, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than the case where it is changed from a daytime image to an evening image.

  Returning to FIG. 10-12, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the value corresponding to the background image (background image of change destination) in the background change notice effect determined in 127 SGS 315 to the background notice effect flag of the entry (127 SGS 316). When the image of the evening is determined as the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect, the background change notice effect flag is set to “1”, and the background image in the background change notice effect (change When a night image is determined as the previous background image), “2” may be set to the background change advance effect flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold display notice effect flag of the entry and sets the chance eye notice effect flag in the entry eye Set "0" corresponding to execution, and proceed to 127 SGS 323 (127 SGS 317, 127 SGS 318).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 at 127 SGS 319 determines that the effect mode change operation restriction display effect for notifying that the effect mode change operation by the stick controller 31A is restricted based on the execution of the advance read notice effect. The process is executed (127 SGS 319), and the value of the prefetching undecided flag of the entry is set to “0” indicating that it is decided to execute or not to perform the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetch notice setting process is ended. .

  In addition, in the 127 SGS 320, the effect control CPU 120 is already executing the prefetch advance notice effect, that the entry is the hold storage of the second special view, and that the buffer number of the entry is “1-1”. Because the gaming state is a high base state, etc., "0" corresponding to non-execution of the hold display notice effect is set in the hold display notice effect flag of the entry, and the background change notice effect flag of the entry is set in the background. “0” corresponding to the non-execution of the change preview effect is set (127 SGS 320, 127 SGS 321, 127 SGS 322), 127 SGS 323 is executed, and the prefetch advance notice setting process is ended.

  When the value of the effect mode flag in the 127 SGS 307 is “2” (127 SGS 307; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect according to the symbol designating command and the change category of the entry. The type of the read advance notice effect (pending display notice effect or chance eye notice effect) is determined (127 SGS 324).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the non-execution of the advance read notice effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and 30% Decide on the execution of the pending display notice effect at a rate of 70%, and determine the execution of the chance eye notice effect at a rate of 70%. In addition, if the symbol designation command is "missing" and the change category is "non-reach", non-execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution of pending display notice effect at a rate of 5%. It decides and decides the execution of the chance eye announcement production at the rate of 0%. In addition, if the symbol designation command is "loss" and the variation category is "other", non-execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%. And decide the execution of the chance eye preview effect at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the symbol specification command is "loss" and the variation category is "super reach", the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect at a rate of 25%. Decide, and decide the execution of the chance eye preview effect at a rate of 10%. When the symbol designation command is "small hit", the non-execution of the advance read notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

  That is, in the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined in the B mode, control is performed to the big hit gaming state than when non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. When the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined while the rate is high, the rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled is higher than when the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined.

  Returning to FIG. 10-13, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect has been determined at 127 SGS 324 (127 SGS 325). If it is determined that the pre-read advance notice effect is not performed in 127 SGS 324 (127 SGS 325; N), the processes of 127 SGS 320 to 127 SGS 322 and 127 SGS 323 are executed to end the pre-read advance notice setting process.

  If the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in 127 SGS 324 (127 SGS 325; Y), it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined in 127 SGS 324 (127 SGS 326). If the execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect is determined in 127 SGS 324 (127 SGS 326; Y), the processing of 127 SGS 311 to 127 SGS 314 c, 127 SGS 319, and 127 SGS 323 is executed, and the prefetch advance notice setting process is ended.

  Further, when the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined in 127 SGS 324 (127 SGS 326; N), the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the chance eye notice effect is determined according to the symbol designating command and the change category of the entry (127 SGS 327).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), when the symbol designating command of the entry is "big hit", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye preview effect is even at a ratio of 30%. The combination is determined to be “246”, and the stopping pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye preview effect is determined to be “135” that is an odd combination at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "loss" and the variation category is "non-reach", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye notice effect is determined to "246" which is an even combination at a rate of 95%. Then, the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the chance eye preview effect is determined to be "135" which is an odd number combination at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variation category is "super reach", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye advance notice effect is determined to "246" which is an even combination, at a rate of 80%. At the rate of 20%, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern in the chance eye notice production is determined to "135" which is an odd combination. In addition, if the symbol designation command is "lost" and the variation category is "super reach", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye advance notice effect is determined to "246" which is an even combination, at a ratio of 75%. The stop pattern of the decoration pattern in the chance eye notice production is determined to be “135” which is an odd number combination at a ratio of 25%.

  That is, when the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined in the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol “135” is displayed on the image display device 5 in the change indication prior to the change indication targeted for the chance eye notice effect. When it is derived and displayed by the combination of "", it will be controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the decoration symbol is derived and displayed by the combination of "246" on the image display device 5 as chance eye advance notice effect ing.

  Returning to FIG. 10-13, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value corresponding to the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye advance notice effect determined at 127 SGS 327 in the chance eye notice effect flag of the entry (127 SGS 328). In addition, when “246” which is an even combination is determined as the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye preview effect, “1” is set in the chance eye preview effect flag, and the ornamental pattern of the chance eye preview effect is When "135" which is an odd combination is determined as the stop pattern, "2" may be set to the chance eye advance notice flag.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” corresponding to non-execution of the hold display notice effect in the hold display notice effect flag of the entry, and sets the background change notice effect flag of the entry in the non-background change notice effect. “0” corresponding to the execution is set (127 SGS 329, 127 SGS 330), the process of 127 SGS 323 is performed, and the prefetching advance notice setting process is ended.

  In the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to display each hold display in a color corresponding to the value of the hold display advance effect flag by executing the hold display update process. . That is, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined (the hold display notice effect flag of the entry of any of the buffer numbers “1-2” to “1-4” in the first special view hold storage is “1” or In the case where “2” is set), a new hold display is displayed in blue or red in the first hold storage display area 127SG005D immediately after the execution of the hold display preview effect is determined. In addition, when non-execution of the pending display advance notice effect is determined (“0” in the pending display advance effect flag of any entry of buffer numbers “1-2” to “1-4” in the first special view pending storage) Is set, immediately after the non-execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect is determined, a new on-hold display is displayed in a castle in the first on-hold storage display area 127SG005D.

  Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to an image according to the value of the background change announcement effect flag by executing the background image update process. That is, when execution of the background change notice effect is determined (the hold display notice effect flag of the entry of one of the buffer numbers “1-2” to “1-4” in the first special view hold storage is “1”. Or when “2” is set, the background image of the image display device 5 is a normal background image from the background image of daytime or the background image of the evening or night immediately after the execution of the background change notice effect is determined Updated to In the case where the variation display as the target of the background change preview effect is finished in the state where the background image of the evening or night is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 performs the image display device in the background image update process. The background change notice effect may be ended by updating the background image displayed in No. 5 from the background image of the evening or night to the background image of daytime.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when execution of prefetch advance notice effect has already been determined, or when newly generated pending storage is the second special view pending storage, newly generated pending storage Even if 1 is the first special view reserve storage, if there is one reserve storage number, if there is a reserve storage where the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, if the gaming state is high base status, Although the form which determines non-execution of pre-reading advance notice production is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, in either case, execution of pre-reading advance notice production may be determined.

  Further, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, the pre-read advance notice effect is exemplified as a pre-read advance notice effect that can be commonly executed regardless of the effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. However, in the A mode and the B mode, it is possible not to provide a pre-reading advance notice effect that can be executed in common.

  Further, the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which execution of one pre-reading advance notice effect can be determined from among the hold display notice effect, background change notice effect, and chance eye notice effect. The invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to determine execution of two or more prefetch advance notice effects from among the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect.

  Further, in the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment, the form capable of executing the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect is exemplified as the advance notice effect, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be possible to execute only a part of pre-reading notice effects among the pre-reading notice effects, background change pre-noting effects, and chance eye pre-noting effects as pre-reading pre-notice effects. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice effect different from the notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect.

  FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the on-hold display advance notification notification execution process shown in FIG. 10-11. In the on-hold display notice effect notification execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the on-hold display notice effect notification process timer is in operation (127 SGS 501). If the on-hold display advance notice notification process timer is not in operation (127 SGS 501; Y), it is determined whether the on-hold display advance notice notification A execution determination flag is set (127 SGS 502). If the on-hold display advance notice notification A execution determination flag is set (127 SGS 502; Y), the on-hold display advance notice notification A process table is selected, and the process proceeds to 127 SGS 506 (127 SGS 503). If the flag is not set (127 SGS 502; N), it is determined whether the hold display advance notice information notification B execution determination flag is set (127 SGS 504).

  If the hold display advance notice notification B execution decision flag is set (127 SGS 504; Y), the process table for the hold display advance notice notification B is selected, and the process proceeds to 127 SGS 506, and the hold display advance notice notification B execution decision flag is set. If not (127 SGS 504; N), the pending display advance notice notification execution processing ends.

  In 127 SGS 506, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the contents (display control execution data 1, lamp control) of the first process data 1 of the selected process table (the process table for the hold display advance notice notification A or the process display for the hold display notice effect B). Control of the rendering device (image display device 5 as a rendering component, the game effect lamp 9 as a rendering component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as a rendering component) is started according to execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc. (127 SGS 507), and the pending display advance notice notification execution processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the process timer for suspension display advance notice notification is operating in 127 SGS 501 (127 SGS 501; Y), the CPU 120 for effect control reduces the value of the process timer for suspension display advance effect -1 (127 SGS 508) It is determined whether or not the process timer for notifying effect notification has timed out (127 SGS 509). If the process timer for pending display advance notice effect notification has timed out (127 SGS 509; Y), it is determined whether it is the last pending display advance notice effect notifying timer that the timer is further out (127 SGS 510).

  If it is not the last pending display advance notice effect notification timer that the timer has timed out (127 SGS 510; N), switching of the pending display advance notice effect notification process data is performed (127 SGS 511). That is, by setting the process timer set value set next in the selected process table to the process timer for the on-hold display advance notice effect notification, the on-hold display advance notice notification process timer is newly started (127 SGS 512). In addition, based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. included in the process data for pending display notice effect notification set next to it, the control state for the rendering device (component for effect) is changed (127 SGS 513), and the pending display advance notice notification execution processing ends.

  In addition, when it is the timer of the last pending display notice effect notification that the timer is out (127 SGS 510; N), the set execution decision flag (the pending display notice effect notification A execution decision flag or the pending display notice effect notification B The execution determination flag is cleared (127 SGS 514), and the on-hold display advance notice notification execution process is ended.

  In the 127SGS 509, when the process timer for suspension display advance notice notification is not determined to be a timer match (127 SGS 509; N), the control of the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for suspension display advance effect notification is executed to suspend display announcement The effect notification execution process is ended (127 SGS 515).

  FIG. 10-17 (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect mode change process shown to FIGS. 10-11. In the effect mode change process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 5, that is, the game state is the low base state or the high base state, but the variable display is During non-execution, during the execution of the variable display, it is determined whether it is in the small hit game (127 SGS 341). If the value of the effect control process flag is 6 or 7 (127 SGS 341; N), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 345, and if the value of the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 5 (127 SGS 341; Y), the fluctuation of super reach It is determined whether the display is in progress (127 SGS 342).

  If the variable display of the super reach is being displayed (127 SGS 342; Y), the effect mode change processing is ended, and if the variable display of the super reach is not being displayed (127 SGS 342; N), the hold display notice is further notified in the start winning reception command buffer 127 SG 194A. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which “1” or “2” is set in any of the presentation flag, the background change announcement presentation flag, and the chance eye announcement presentation flag (127 SGS 343). If there is an entry in which “1” or “2” is set in any of the hold display notice effect flag, the background change notice effect flag, and the chance eye notice effect flag, that is, the execution of the advance notice effect is determined. If there is (127 SGS 343; Y), the effect mode change process is ended.

  In addition, when there is no entry in which “1” or “2” is set in the pending display notice effect flag, the background change notice effect flag, and the chance eye notice effect flag, that is, non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined. If there are (127 SGS 343; N and 127 SGS 344; N), the process proceeds to 127 SGS 345.

  At 127 SGS 345, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not there is an effect mode change operation (operation of the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction) (127 SGS 345). If there is no effect mode change operation (127 SGS 345; N), the effect mode change process is ended, and if there is an effect mode change operation (127 SGS 345; Y), the value of the effect mode flag is already "2" or not It is determined whether or not (127 SGS 346). If the value of the effect mode flag is "1", that is, if the effect mode is the A mode (127 SGS 346; N), the value of the effect mode flag is incremented by one (127 SGS 347). On the other hand, if the value of the effect mode flag is "2", that is, if the effect mode is the B mode (127 SGS 346; Y), the value of the effect mode flag is set to "1".

  As shown in FIG. 10-17 (B), when the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, the pending display notice effect and the background change notice effect can be executed as the advance notice effect and as the notice effect during the change In the A mode in which the step-up notice effect can be executed, and the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, the pending display notice effect and the chance eye notice effect can be executed as the advance notice effect and during fluctuation It is B mode which can perform serif announcement production as announcement production.

  When the execution of the background change notice effect is determined in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment (see FIG. 10-12), the effect is performed immediately after the pre-reading notice setting process that determines the execution of the background change notice effect. While the background image changes as the control CPU 120 executes the background image update process, when the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined (see FIG. 10-12), at the timing when the next variable display ends. The production pattern stops with a chance. That is, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the background change preview effect is determined in the A mode and the execution of the chance eye preview effect is determined in the B mode, these background change preview effects and The production mode and the execution timing are different in the chance eye preview production.

  In addition, with the step-up notice effect in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, an effect in which the aspect of the step-up image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages (as shown in FIG. 10-27) The step-up image 127SG005x, the step-up image 127SG005y, and the step-up image 127SG005z are effects in which the size of the character or the image displayed is changed in the order) and the step-up image 127SG005z is finally displayed. The rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is high, and the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is the lowest when the step-up image 127SG005x is finally displayed.

  In the feature part 127SG of the present embodiment, the step-up notice effect is executed as the notice effect during change in the A mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the A mode In the pre-reading advance notice effect, a step-up notice effect may be executed which is different in the effect mode from the in-movement notice effect. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, a mode is described in which the speech preview effect is executed as the preview effect during fluctuation in the B mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the B mode, As the pre-reading advance notice effect, a dialogue advance notice effect in which the effect mode is different from the notice mode during the change may be executed.

  Further, the speech advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 127SG of the present embodiment is an effect that any of the speech A, the speech B, and the speech C is displayed on the image display device, and as shown in FIG. When C is displayed, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and when the word A is displayed, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is the lowest.

  That is, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode is changed by executing the processing of 127SGS 347 and 127SGS 348 to change the value of the effect mode flag.

  Then, after execution of the processing of 127 SGS 347 or 127 SGS 348, the CPU for effect control 120 updates the effect mode notification image 127 SG 005 b according to the value of the effect mode flag, and ends the effect mode change process (127 SGS 349). In the process of 127 SGS 349, if the value of the effect mode flag is 1, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect mode notification image 127 SG 005 b to the display mode according to the A mode, and if the value of the effect mode flag is 2 The presentation mode notification image 127SG005b may be updated to the display mode according to the B mode.

  FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process. In the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning winning reception command buffer 127SG194A, and the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag is any one of “1” to “4”. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the value of is set, that is, whether or not execution of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect has already been determined (127 SGS 501).

  If there is an entry in which any value of “1” to “4” is set in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag (127 SGS 501; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process is ended. If there is no entry in which one of the values "1" to "4" is set in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag (127 SGS 401; N), whether or not the variable display of the super reach is in progress. (127 SGS 403). When the variable display of the super reach is not being displayed (127 SGS 403; N), the start display winning reception command buffer 127 SG 194 A is referred to, and the pending display notice effect flag, the background change notice effect flag, or the chance eye notice effect flag It is determined whether there is an entry in which “2” is set or “2” is set, that is, whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (127 SGS 404). If there is an entry in which “1” or “2” is set in any of the hold display notice effect flag, background change notice effect flag, and chance eye notice effect flag (127 SGS 404; Y), proceed to 127 SGS 406 and hold When there is no entry in which “1” or “2” is set in any of the display notice effect flag, background change notice effect flag, and chance eye notice effect flag (127 SGS 404; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display End the process.

  In 127SGS406, the CPU 120 for effect control has an entry in which “1” or “2” is set to any of the hold display notice effect flag, background change notice effect flag, and chance eye notice effect flag in the start winning winning reception command buffer 127SG194A. The symbol designation command of is specified (127 SGS 406), and the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect (display mode of the operation restriction display image 127 SG 005 c) is determined based on the specified symbol specification command (127 SGS 407).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), when the symbol designating command indicates a big hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be the pattern A at a rate of 10%. The pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern D is determined at a rate of 40%. Also, when the symbol designation command indicates a loss, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined as pattern A at a rate of 40%, determined as pattern B at a rate of 30%, and 20% The pattern C is determined at a rate of 10% and the pattern D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, when the symbol designation command indicates a small hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined as pattern A at 100% ratio, and is determined as pattern B at 0% ratio, 0 Pattern C is determined at a rate of%, and pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (C), in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect, the pattern A is an effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is “small” and the color is “blue”. The pattern B is an effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is "small" and the color is "red", and in the pattern C, the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is "large" and the color is The effect pattern is "blue", and the pattern D is an effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is "large" and the color is "red".

  That is, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, when the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c displayed as the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is large, compared to the case where the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is small. The rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is high (the rate at which the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit is high), and the operation mode display mode of the operation mode display When the color is red, the percentage of the gaming state being controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is blue (the percentage in which the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit is high) There is.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value according to the effect pattern determined in 127 SGS 407 to the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag of the entry (“1” for pattern A, “2” for pattern B, If it is pattern C, “3”, if it is pattern D, “4” is set, and the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process is ended (127 SGS 408).

  In addition, when it is during change of super reach in 127 SGS 403 (127 SGS 403; Y), CPU120 for production control specifies a change display result (127 SGS 409), and production mode change operation restriction display based on the specified change display result. The effect pattern of the effect is determined (127 SGS 410).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), when the variation display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined as the pattern A at a rate of 10%, Pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern D is determined at a rate of 40%. Moreover, when the variation display result is a loss, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be the pattern A at a rate of 40%, and is determined to be the pattern B at a rate of 30%, and a ratio of 20% The pattern C is determined by and the pattern D is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variation display result is a small hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined as pattern A at a rate of 100%, determined as pattern B at a rate of 0%, 0% Pattern C is determined in proportion, and pattern D is determined in proportion of 0%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag of the entry of the corresponding entry (buffer number “1-0” or “2-0”) while the variable display in the start winning reception command buffer is being executed. And the value corresponding to the effect pattern determined in 127 SGS 407 (“1” for pattern A, “2” for pattern B, “3” for pattern C, “4” for pattern D) It sets and ends production mode change operation restriction display production decision processing (127 SGS 412).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (A) and 10-19 (B), in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, and the variation of the super reach. Although the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is the same with the display being executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined At least a part of the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect may be different between the case and the execution of the variable display of the super reach.

  Further, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, although a mode in which the proportion controlled to the big hit gaming state is different according to the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this In addition to or instead of the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is different according to the shape, display period, display position, etc. of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. May be

  FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution processing in the effect control process processing. In the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is in operation (127 SGS 421). If the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is not in operation (127 SGS 421; N), it is further determined whether or not there is an effect mode change operation (operation in the longitudinal direction of the stick controller 31 A) (127 SGS 422). If there is no effect mode change operation (127 SGS 422; N), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution processing ends, and if there is an effect mode change operation (127 SGS 422; Y), further, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag Is determined (127 SGS 423).

  If the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag is not set (127 SGS 423; N), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution processing is ended, and if the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag is set (127 SGS 423) Y: sets a process table of effect mode change operation restriction display effect according to the value of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag (127 SGS 424). Then, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer in the process data 1 of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process table that has been set is started (127 SGS 425).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 follows the contents of the process data 1 of the set effect mode change operation restriction display effect process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data, etc.) Control of the image display device 5 as a part, the game effect lamp 9 as a part for effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R as parts for effect is started, and the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process is ended (1278 SGS 426).

  On the other hand, if the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is operating in 127 SGS 421 (127 SGS 421; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer by 1 (127 SGS 427) It is determined whether the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer has timed out (127 SGS 428). When the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer has timed out (127 SGS 428; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process data is switched (127 SGS 429). That is, by setting the process mode set value set next in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process table to the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is started again (S127 SGS 430). In addition, the control state for the rendering device (the component for effect) is determined based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. included in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process data set next to it. A change is made (127 SGS 431), and the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution processing ends.

  When the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer has not timed out (127 SGS 428; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer are controlled to change the effect mode. The operation restriction display effect execution processing ends (127 SGS 432).

  As described above, in the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment, when execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, or during change display of the super reach, change of the effect mode by change operation of the effect mode becomes impossible. The operation restriction display image 127 SG 005 c is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the change operation of the effect mode. Furthermore, since the operation restriction display image 127SG005c suggests the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the color and size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, the player can use the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. It is possible to recognize an approximate proportion in which the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

  FIGS. 10-21 is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound volume change process in an effect control process process. In the volume change process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the confirmation sound output timer is in operation (127 SGS 461). If the confirmation sound output timer is not in operation (127 SGS 461; N), it is determined whether there is a volume change operation (operation in the left or right direction of the stick controller 31 A) (127 SGS 462). If there is no volume change operation (127 SGS 462; N), the volume change processing is ended, and if there is a volume change operation (127 SGS 462; Y), the volume corresponding to the volume change operation is set (127 SGS 463).

  Specifically, for example, when the stick controller 31A is operated in the right direction as the volume change operation, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one step, and the stick controller 31A is moved in the left direction as the volume change operation. When it is operated, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is reduced by one step. When the stick controller 31A is operated in the right direction with the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R already at the maximum volume, the maximum volume is reset, and the sound already output from the speakers 8L, 8R When the stick controller 31A is operated in the left direction in a state where the volume of the is the minimum volume, the minimum volume may be reset.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the confirmation sound at the volume set in the speakers 8L and 8R through the 127 SGS 464 (127 SGS 464), sets the confirmation sound output timer, and ends the volume change processing (127 SGS 465) .

  If the confirmation sound output timer is operating in 127 SGS 461 (127 SGS 461; Y), the value of the confirmation sound output timer is decremented by 1 (127 SGS 466), and it is determined whether the confirmation sound output timer has timed up ( 127 SGS 467). When the confirmation sound output timer is up (127 SGS 467; Y), the output of the confirmation sound from the speakers 8 L and 8 R is ended and the volume change processing is ended (127 SGS 468), and the confirmation sound output timer is not up. In the case (127 SGS 467; N), the volume change process is ended without executing the process of 127 SGS 468.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode can be changed by the operation in the front-rear direction of the stick controller 31A, and the output from the speakers 8L, 8R by the operation in the left-right direction of the stick controller 31A. Sound volume can be changed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A), the change of the effect mode is over the period from the determination of the execution of the pre-reading notice effect to the end of the variable display which is the object of the pre-reading notice effect. On the other hand, the change of the volume of the sound outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible regardless of whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B), while the variation display of the super reach is being performed, the change of the rendering mode becomes impossible, while the change of the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is the super reach. Is possible regardless of whether or not the

  FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the first change start command reception flag is set (127 SGS 351). When the first variation start command reception flag is set (127SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special view reservation storage in the start winning combination reception command buffer 127SG194A. The various command data and various flags that have been stored are shifted upward by one for each buffer number (127 SGS 352). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they can not be shifted because there is no shift destination.

  If the first change start command reception flag is not set (127 SGS 351; N), it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag is set (127 SGS 353). If the second change start command reception flag is not set (127 SGS 353; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second change start command reception flag is set (127 SGS 353; Y), start The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the second special view reservation storage in the winning reception command buffer 127SG194A are advanced by one buffer number each Shift to (127SGS 354). The contents of the buffer number “2-0” are erased because they can not be shifted because there is no shift destination.

  After execution of the 127 SGS 352 or 127 SGS 354, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (127 SGS 355).

  Next, it is determined whether "1" or "2" is set in the chance eye advance notice effect flag of any of the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" in the start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A. (127 SGS 356). When only “0” is set in the chance eye advance notice flag of any of buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4” in the start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A (127 SGS 356; N), the display result In accordance with the data stored in the designated command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command), the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined (S276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area Do.

  In addition, in the processing of 127 SGS 357, when the received variable display result designation command corresponds to the probability variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 120 combines the decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged as “7” or “3” as a stop symbol. Determine the (big hit symbol). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command corresponds to the probability variation big hit B, the combination pattern (big hit design) of 3 designs as a stop design is arranged with odd numbers different from "7" and "3". . Further, when the received variable display result designation command corresponds to a non-probable variation big hit, a combination (big hit symbol) of decorative symbols in which three symbols are even and aligned as a stop symbol is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command corresponds to a loss, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol or a combination of decorative symbols in lost reach (a lost symbol) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command corresponds to a small hit, a combination of small decorative symbols (small hit symbols) in which three symbols are aligned with a special symbol or the like different from numbers as a stop symbol is determined.

  On the other hand, if “1” or “2” is set in the chance eye advance notice flag of any of the buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4” in the start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A, the chance eye The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the value of the advance effect flag (127 SGS 358).

  In the process of 127 SGS 358, the effect control CPU 120 sets “1” in the chance eye advance notice flag of the buffer number “1-1” to “1-4” in the start winning winning reception command buffer 127 SG 194A. If it is, the combination of “246” (1st chance symbol) having 3 even symbols as an even stop symbol is determined (first chance symbol pattern), and the buffer number “1-1” to “1 at start winning reception command buffer 127SG194A” If “2” is set in any of the chance eye advance notice effects flags of “4”, determine the “135” combination (second chance eye symbol) in which 3 symbols are odd as a stop symbol for losing .

  After execution of the processing of 127 SGS 357 or 127 SGS 358, CPU 120 for effect control executes the during-announcement effect determining process, and determines whether or not to execute during-varying announcement effect according to the effect mode, and determines the effect pattern of during-varying announcement effect Do.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (A), if the variation display result is a big hit when the effect mode is the A mode, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Decide one-step display of step-up image (effect pattern only for displaying step-up image 127SG005x) at 10% ratio, and two-step display of step-up image at 30% ratio (step-up image 127SG005x → step up) The effect pattern to be displayed in order of the image 127SG005y is determined, and the three step display of the step-up image (the effect pattern to be displayed in order of step-up image 127SG005x → step-up image 127SG005y → step-up image 127SG005z) is determined at 50% .

  Also, if the variable display result is non-reach lose, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%, the one-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 20%, and the step at a rate of 0% Determine the two-step display of the up image and determine the three-step display of the step-up image at a rate of 0%.

  In addition, if the variation display result is another loss such as a normal reach loss, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the one-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 30%. The two-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of%, and the three-step display of the step-up image at a rate of 0%.

  In addition, if the variable display result is a super reach loss, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, the one-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 15%, and the step is performed at a rate of 40%. Determine the two-step display of the up image, and determine the three-step display of the step-up image at a rate of 15%.

  In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%, the one-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 0%, and the step at a rate of 00%. Determine the two-step display of the up image and determine the three-step display of the step-up image at a rate of 0%.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (B), if the variation display result is a big hit when the effect mode is the B mode, the non-execution of the serif announcement effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and 10% Determine the display of serif A (promotion pattern for displaying serif A) in proportion, determine the display of serif B (promotion pattern for displaying serif B) in proportion of 30%, and display of serif C in proportion of 50% (The effect pattern for displaying the dialogue C) is determined.

  Also, if the variable display result is non-reach lost, determine the non-execution of the serif announcement effect at a rate of 80%, determine the display of the serif A at a rate of 20%, the display of the serif B at a rate of 0% Determine the percentage serif C display of 0%.

  In addition, if the variation display result is another loss such as a normal reach loss etc., the non-execution of serif announcement effect is determined at a rate of 50%, the display of serif A is determined at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 20% Determine the display of serif B and determine the display of serif C at a rate of 0%.

  Moreover, if the variable display result is a super reach loss, the non-execution of the serif preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%, the display of the serif A is determined at a rate of 15%, and the display of the serif B at a rate of 40%. Determine the display of serif C at a rate of 15%.

  In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the serif announcement effect is determined at a rate of 100%, the display of the serif A is determined at a rate of 0%, and the display of the serif B at a rate of 00%. Decide and determine the display of serif C at a rate of 0%.

  In addition, with regard to the during-fluctuating advance announcement effect for which execution has been determined, a process table for the during-fluctuation advance announcement effect for which the execution has been determined is set during execution of the variable display effect process, and The processing of the process data in the set process table may be executed by starting.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command (1287 SGS 363). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (127 SGS 364).

  In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in time series in correspondence with each process data n (from 1 to N) There is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image as an effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) The control of the device 5, the various lamps as presentation parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (127 SGS 365).

  In the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the CPU for effect control 120 performs control so that variation display of a decorative pattern is performed by a variation pattern corresponding to a one-to-one variation pattern specification command, but the CPU 120 for effect control Alternatively, the variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (127 SGS 366). Further, a predetermined time is set to the fluctuation control timer (127 SGS 367). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left middle right decorative pattern to the VRAM every time the predetermined time passes, according to the image data written to the VRAM. The display signal is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby the variation of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (S172), and the variable display start setting processing is ended (127 SGS 368).

  Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-25 to 10-28.

  First, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (A) and FIG. 10-25 (B), in the low base state where the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, the upper right portion of the image display device 5 produces effects The mode notification image 127SG005b is displayed. Then, in a state in which the variable display is not performed or in a state in which the variable display of non-reach or normal reach is performed, the player switches the production mode by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction. Further, when the rendering mode is switched by the operation in the front-rear direction of the stick controller 31A, the display mode is changed according to the rendering mode of the destination after the rendering mode notification image 127SG005b is switched, and the player is notified of the presentation mode notification image 127SG005b It is possible to recognize the current rendering mode by visually recognizing the.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (C) to FIG. 10-25 (E), the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect (the chance eye advance notice effect in FIG. 10-25) based on the occurrence of the new start winning combination. When it is determined, it is impossible to change the effect mode by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction during the period from the determination of the execution of the advance notice effect to the end of the variable display of the advance notice effect. Become. Furthermore, when an operation in the back and forth direction of the stick controller 31A is detected during a period in which the effect mode can not be changed, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is an effect mode notification image 127SG005b as an effect mode change operation restriction display effect. Is displayed in duplicate.

  At this time, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c differs depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not (the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state) by the variable display which is the object of the pre-reading advance notice effect The color and size are different in proportion, and it is possible for the player to recognize an approximate proportion in which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the color and the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), the start winning prize is not performed when the preread advance notice effect is not executed and the non-reach or normal reach variation display is being executed. When it is determined that the on-hold display advance notice effect is to be executed based on the start winning, the on-hold display notice effect notification according to the set effect mode is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the effect mode is the A mode, the image 127SG005A of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image 127SG005A of the character A is displayed. It is notified that the execution of the on-hold display notice effect is determined that the on-hold display, which is the target of the on-hold display notice effect, is displayed in blue or red. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the effect mode is the B mode, the image 127SG005B of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the hold display notice is given by the image 127SG005B of the character B. It is informed that the execution of the effect has been determined that the on-hold display that is the target of the on-hold display notice effect is displayed in blue or red.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B) and FIG. 10-26 (C), when the on-hold display notice effect and the on-hold display notice effect notification are executed, the background change notice effect or the chance eye notice effect is executed. As in the case where is determined, it is impossible to change the rendering mode.

  Further, when the effect mode is the A mode, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A) to FIG. 10-27 (D), the step-up notice effect may be executed during the variable display. As step-up notice effects, only the step-up image 127SG005x is displayed as the first step, the step-up image 127SG005y is displayed as the second step after the step-up image 127SG005x, and the step-up image 127SG005y. In the third step, the step-up image 127SG005z may be displayed, and when the step-up image 127SG005z is displayed, the ratio at which the variation display result is the largest hit is the highest, and the case where only the step-up image 127SG005x is displayed is the most The rate at which the variable display results in a big hit is low.

  When the effect mode is the B mode, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (A) to FIG. 10-28 (D), the serif A is displayed as the serif announcement effect, and the serif B is displayed. When the dialogue is displayed, the dialogue C may be displayed, and when the dialogue C is displayed, the rate at which the variable display result is the big hit is high, and when the dialogue A is displayed, the variable display result is the big hit. The rate is lower.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode can be changed by the operation in the back and forth direction of the stick controller 31A, and the execution of the advance read advance notice effect is determined, the display of variation in super reach, etc. When the stick controller 31A is operated in the front-back direction during a period in which the change of the effect mode is impossible, the change of the effect mode is impossible by displaying the operation restriction display image 127SG005c on the image display device 5 In addition to the fact that the player can be made to recognize that it is possible to suggest that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c While making the player pay attention, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, when the color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is red, a mode is exemplified in which the ratio of controlling the gaming state to the big hit gaming state is higher than when it is blue. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is blue, the proportion of the gaming state controlled to the big hit gaming state may be higher than when it is red. . Furthermore, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, when the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is large, the ratio in which the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is illustrated as compared to the case where it is small. The operation restriction display image 127SG005c is not limited, and may be controlled so that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state when the size is small.

  Further, in the characteristic part 127SG of the present embodiment, although a mode is shown in which the ratio in which the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit is different according to the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, the present invention is limited thereto In addition to the effect that suggests that the variable display results such as the pre-reading advance notice effect and the notice effect during the change effect are a big hit according to the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, other than the effect that suggests that the high probability state It may be made to differ in the execution ratio of the effect which suggests that specific pre-reading advance notice production (for example, suspension display notice production etc.) or advance notice production during change is performed.

  In addition, with regard to the change of the effect mode, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined during the change of the super reach or until the end of the change display of these super reach, the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect While it is impossible until the end of the display, the change in the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always possible regardless of the change in the super reach or the execution of the pre-reading preview effect, Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R properly without unnecessary restriction during a period in which the variation of the rendering mode is not possible, such as when the super reach is changing or when the execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is determined You can change the volume of the.

  In addition, with regard to the change of the effect mode, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined during the change of the super reach or until the end of the change display of these super reach, the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect If it is impossible to change the effect mode while it is impossible to change the effect mode, the image display device 5 performs an operation in the back and forth direction of the stick controller (operation to change the effect mode). Since the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed and the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c can indicate that the variable display result will be a big hit, it is possible to change the effect mode, so it is possible to enjoy the game during the period Can be improved.

  Further, the CPU 103 can determine in advance whether or not the big hit gaming state is controlled for the pending storage for which the variable display has not yet been executed by executing the winning random number value determination process, and the CPU 120 for effect control Based on the determination result of the winning random number value determination process of the CPU 103, the execution of the prereading advance notice effect is determined. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result of the in-winning random number value determination process of the CPU 103 in 127 SGS 343 of the effect mode change process shown in FIG. Since the change of the effect mode is not performed by ending the effect mode change process without executing the process of 127 SGS 349, the waste of the repeated determination of the advance announcement notice effect due to the change of the effect mode is eliminated. can do.

  In particular, in the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment, temporarily changing the presentation mode is permitted after determining the execution of the pre-reading advance presentation production (for example, the background change announcement presentation in the A mode) according to the presentation mode. And, it is necessary to determine again the execution mode of the advance notice effect (for example, the chance eye advance notice effect in the case of B mode) and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the advance notice effect after switching of the effect mode. Inconsistencies in the production and production will occur. For the above reasons, in the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment, when execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the change in the effect mode is restricted to avoid an increase in processing load and an inconsistency in the effect. There is.

  In addition, when the execution of the background change advance announcement is determined in A mode and when the execution of the chance eye advance announcement is determined in B mode, the effect mode and the effect in the background change announcement effect and the chance eye advance effect Since the timings are different, it is possible to prevent the rendering aspect and the rendering timing of the pre-prediction notice rendering becoming inappropriate.

  In the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode and the effect timing are different depending on whether the execution of the background change preview effect is determined in A mode and the execution of the chance eye preview effect is determined in B mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presentation timing may be the same for the background change announcement production and the chance eye announcement presentation. Furthermore, in the A mode, when the execution of the on-hold display preview effect is determined and in the B mode, the execution of the on-hold display preview effect is determined, the on-hold display preview effect according to the effect mode in which the execution is determined. At least one of the mode (display mode of the hold display) and the effect timing may be different.

  In addition, when execution of the hold display notice effect is determined as the advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the display of the hold display in blue or red is started on the image display device 5, and The hold display notice effect notification according to the mode is executed. Furthermore, when the execution of the hold display preview effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs 127 SGS 345 based on the execution of the hold display preview effect being determined in 127 SGS 343 of the effect mode change processing shown in FIG. 10-17. Since the change of the effect mode is not performed by ending the effect mode change process without executing the process of ̃127 SGS 349, it is possible to prevent the execution of an inappropriate suspension display advance notice effect notification.

  In the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment, when execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect is determined as the pre-reading advance notice effect, an example is shown in which the on-hold display advance notice effect notification corresponding to the effect mode is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of the on-hold display notice effect is determined as the pre-reading advance notice effect, even if the on-hold display notice effect notification of the common mode is executed regardless of the effect mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the on-hold display advance notice effect notification is executed when execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect is determined as the pre-reading advance notice effect. When it is determined that the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect are not performed as the advance notice effect, the execution of the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect are notified. May be

  The feature part 127SG of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes or additions can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 127SG of the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A is activated regardless of whether the background change announcement production or the chance eye announcement production is being performed, or the super reach variation display is being performed. In the embodiment, the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed by the operation in the left and right direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a modification 127SG-1 is shown in FIG. ~ As shown in FIG. 10-29 (D), during execution of pre-reading advance notice effect, during execution of variable display of super reach, etc., the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the left / right direction You may not change the Furthermore, it is made impossible to change the volume outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the horizontal direction during the execution of the background change preview production and the chance eye preview production, the execution of the variable display of the super reach, etc. In the case where it is determined that the change of the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R can not be made based on the fact that the operation of the stick controller 31A in the left and right direction is performed during the period when the change of the volume is not possible. The volume change impossible notification image 127SG005e may be displayed on the image display device 5 so that the player can be accurately notified that the change of the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is impossible.

  Furthermore, as with the operation restriction display image 127SG005c described above, it may be suggested that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the display mode (size and color) of the volume change informing notification image 127SG005e.

  Further, in the characteristic part 127SG of the above embodiment, the rendering mode is changed by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction, and the embodiment in which the rendering that can be performed in each rendering mode is different is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect modes having different execution frequencies of effects may be provided, and these effect modes may be changeable by the operation in the front-rear direction of the stick controller 31A.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C) as the modified example 127SG-2, the execution frequency of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the execution frequency of the pre-changing advance notice effect are normal (medium Based on the daytime mode, the frequency of execution of the advance notice effect is high and the execution frequency of the notice effect during the change is low, and the frequency of execution of the advance notice effect is low, and the frequency of the notice effect during the change is high The night mode is provided (execution frequency of pre-reading notice effect: evening> day> night, execution frequency of notice effect during fluctuation: night> day> evening), these three effect modes are switched by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the back and forth direction It is good if possible. When the effect mode is switched, the current effect mode is any of daytime, evening, or night by displaying a background image according to the switched effect mode on the image display device 5. The player may easily recognize the

  In addition, in the feature portion 127SG of the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the change of the effect mode is impossible, such as during the variable display of the super reach or when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the effect mode operation restriction display By executing the effect determination process only once, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c of the same display mode is displayed each time the operation in the back and forth direction of the stick controller 31A (operation of changing the effect mode) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by executing the effect mode operation restriction display effect determination process each time the effect mode change operation is performed during a period in which the effect mode can not be changed. The operation restriction display image 127SG005 is displayed in a different display mode each time the effect mode change operation is performed during a period in which the effect mode can not be changed. There may also be displayed.

  In addition, the characteristic unit 127SG of the embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed as the suggested effect in the present invention based on the change operation of the effect mode during the period in which the change of the effect mode is impossible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and changes a part of the display pattern of the decorative symbol in the variable display based on the change operation of the effect mode during the period in which the change of the effect mode is impossible. In the image display device 5, an image different from the operation restriction display image 127SG005c may be displayed, or the movable body 32 may be operated, or the suggestion effect may be executed in a different rendering mode from the display of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c .

  Further, in the embodiment, a form in which a title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), pachinko gaming machine 1 The main board 11 (CPU 103) transmits different commands to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) according to the activated state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while cold starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 and setting change state A mode in which it is possible to execute start notification in a mode different from the case where it is started, and to notify that the RAM 102 is cleared when changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27). Characteristic part 122SG), the effect mode can be changed by the operation of the stick controller 31A, and the change of the effect mode is restricted. During the period, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, and the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c suggests that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of features may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIGS. 10-1 to 10-30).

  For example, in the case where the feature part 122SG and the feature part 127SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed based on the fact that the stick controller 31A is operated during the change of the effect mode is restricted. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested by displaying it and displaying the operation restriction display image 127SG005c.

1 pachinko gaming machine 2 game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main board 12 effect control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
Detection means capable of detecting a plurality of types of motion;
Effect setting means capable of setting a plurality of types of effects while executing variable display, and capable of setting effects corresponding to the types of detected motion;
Equipped with
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting related to a specific type of effect among the settings related to a plurality of effects is restricted, while the setting related to a type different from the setting for the specific type of effect is not restricted. A gaming machine to be.

Images